FRV 07 Eng PDF

06/10/30 16:41:48 32SJD620_001
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it
is sold.
This owners manual covers all versions. Therefore, you may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not
on your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in this
manual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.
06/10/30 16:41:57 32SJD620_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection was a wise investment. It will give you years As you read this manual, you will
of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
(On German type)
Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle. 1. Mounting the front licence plate:
Read the Service Book/warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the Mount the front licence plate to
coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. the provided holder taking care
that the upper edge of the licence
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual or plate does not project above the
the separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble- upper surface of the bumper.
free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs
maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in 2. Mounting the rear licence plate:
servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated Mount the rear licence plate to the
to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and back of the vehicle so that its
concerns. lower edge is flush with the lower
end of the surface provided for
Best wishes and happy motoring. mounting.
Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to

read this owners manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.
i
06/10/30 16:42:08 32SJD620_003
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels on the vehicle.
Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you dont follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you dont follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you dont follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
ii
06/10/30 16:42:21 32SJD620_004
Contents
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
Your Vehicle at a Glance........... 2 Before Driving .................... 183 Taking Care of the
What fuel to use, how to break-in Unexpected ........................ 295
Driver and Passenger Safety ..... 7 your new vehicle, and how to load This section covers several
Important information about the luggage and other cargo. problems motorists sometimes
proper use and care of your experience, and details how to
vehicles seat belts, an overview of Driving ............................... 199 handle them.
the supplemental restraint system, The proper way to start the engine,
and valuable information on how shift the transmission, and park; Technical Information.......... 327
to protect children with child plus what you need to know if ID numbers, dimensions,
restraints. youre planning to tow a trailer. capacities, and technical
information.
Instruments and Controls ...... 69 Maintenance ....................... 227
Explains the purpose of each The maintenance schedule shows Index ................................. 341
instrument panel indicator and you when you need to take your
gauge, and how to use the controls vehicle to the dealer. There is also
on the dashboard and steering a list of things to check and
column. instructions on how to check them.
Features ............................. 139 Appearance Care ................. 287

How to operate the climate control Tips on cleaning and protecting
system, the audio system, and your vehicle.
other convenience features.
1
06/10/30 16:42:28 32SJD620_005
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Left-hand drive type INSTRUMENT PANEL INSIDE MIRROR RAINFALL SENSOR

1
AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 148)
INDICATORS (P. 72, 73) (P. 126) (P. 88) CLOCK (P. 174)
GAUGES (P. 81)
DRIVERS PASSENGERS FRONT

FRONT AIRBAG AIRBAG
(P. 12, 27) (P. 12, 27)
CLIMATE CONTROL
DOOR LOCK TAB SYSTEM
(P. 99) (P. 140)
BONNET RELEASE
HANDLE (P. 186) MANUAL
TRANSMISSION3
MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 204)
(P. 126) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION2
(P. 207)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 185) PARKING BRAKE
HANDLE3 (P. 128)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL2 (P. 129) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK1 (P. 176)
1 : For some types

2 : For automatic transmission models only
3 : For manual transmission models only
2
06/10/30 16:42:35 32SJD620_006
Left-hand drive type

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 93) (P. 87)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN
SIGNALS (P. 90) REAR WINDOW
FRONT FOG LIGHTS2/ DEMISTER (P. 94)/
REAR FOG LIGHT MIRROR HEATERS
(P. 91) BUTTON
(P. 127)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES HAZARD WARNING
(P. 123) BUTTON
(P. 94)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS2
(P. 176)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES2
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER2 (P. 119)
(P. 122) HORN1 CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS2
(P. 179)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
(VSA) OFF SWITCH (P. 218) (P. 95)
1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2 : For some types
3
06/10/30 16:42:42 32SJD620_007
Right-hand drive type AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 148) RAINFALL SENSOR1 INSIDE MIRROR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLOCK (P. 174) (P. 88) (P. 126) INDICATORS (P. 72, 73)
GAUGES (P. 81)
PASSENGERS FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 12, 27)
DRIVERS FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 12, 27)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 140) DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 99)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION3 BONNET RELEASE
(P. 204) HANDLE
AUTOMATIC (P. 186)
TRANSMISSION2 MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 207) (P. 126)
PARKING BRAKE FUEL FILL DOOR
HANDLE3 RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 128) (P. 185)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK1 (P. 176) PARKING BRAKE PEDAL2 (P. 129)
1 : For some types

4
06/10/30 16:42:49 32SJD620_008
Right-hand drive type

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS1 (P. 90) INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN WIPERS/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS3/REAR FOG LIGHT3 BRIGHTNESS WASHERS1
(P. 91) (P. 93) (P. 87)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS3
(P. 176)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW (P. 123)
DEMISTER (P. 94)/
MIRROR HEATERS
BUTTON
(P. 127) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS3
(P. 179)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 94)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER3
(P. 122)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES3
(P. 119) HORN2 STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(P. 95) (VSA) OFF SWITCH2 (P. 218)
1 : Except for European models, these switches change locations with each other.
3 : For some types
5
06/10/30 16:42:51 32SJD620_009
6
06/10/30 16:42:56 32SJD620_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 If You Must Drive with Several
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children .................................... 36
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ................................ 23 If a Child Requires Close
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 Attention ................................... 37
explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
it tells you how to properly restrain Your Airbags ............................ 26 Protecting Infants and Small
infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ....... 26 Children .................................... 39
How Your Front Airbags Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Work.......................................... 27 Protecting Small Children .......... 41
Your Vehicles Safety Features........ 9 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Selecting a Child Restraint
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 How Your Side Curtain System ........................................... 43
Airbags .......................................... 12 Airbags Work ........................... 29 Installing a Child Restraint
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 14 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 System....................................... 45
1. Close the Doors ....................... 14 Airbag Service .............................. 30 Child Restraint System for EU
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 Countries .................................. 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15 Protecting Children General With the Lower Anchorages ..... 47
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16 Guidelines ................................. 32 With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 52
5. Fasten and Position the Seat All Children Must Be With a Tether ............................... 57
Belts ...................................... 17 Restrained ................................ 32 Protecting Larger Children ............ 60
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting All Children Should Sit in a Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 61
Position ................................. 18 Back Seat .................................. 33 Using a Booster Seat ................... 61
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 The Passengers Front Airbag When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 Poses Serious Risks................. 33 Front .......................................... 63
Additional Information About Your The Side Airbag Poses Serious Additional Safety Precautions .... 64
Seat Belts .................................. 21 Risks .......................................... 36 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 65
Seat Belt System Components ... 21 Safety Labels .................................... 66
Driver and Passenger Safety 7

06/10/30 16:43:06 32SJD620_011
Important Safety Precautions
Youll find many safety children should use a booster seat Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this and a lap/shoulder belt until they Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. can use the belt properly without a crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page booster seat (see pages 32 64 ). the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. Be Aware of Airbag Hazards occur at lower speeds. Never drive
While airbags can save lives, they faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt can cause serious or fatal injuries to conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in occupants who sit too close to them, maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are or are not properly restrained.
designed to supplement seat belts, Infants, young children, and short Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though adults are at the greatest risk. Be Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, sure to follow all instructions and Having a tyre blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers warnings in this manual. mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 17 ). Dont Drink and Drive of such problems, check your tyre
Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children one drink can reduce your ability to and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should respond to changing conditions, and maintenance (see page 229 , and for
ride properly restrained in the back your reaction time gets worse with EU countries and New Zealand, see
seat or the front centre seat. every additional drink. So dont drink the Service Book/separate service
However we recommend positioning and drive, and dont let your friends information booklet that came with
children in the back to avoid possible drink and drive, either. your vehicle).
distraction to the driver. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child restraint system. Larger
8 Driver and Passenger Safety

06/10/30 16:43:13 32SJD620_012
Your Vehicles Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(7) (1) (8) (3) (9) (4) (6) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any

action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(9)
(2) However, you and your passengers
(5) (7) (10) (8)
cant take full advantage of these
(11) features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(2) (7) Front Airbags
The following pages explain how you
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
: For some types
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners yourself and your passengers.
(11) Outer Lap Tensioner

06/10/30 16:43:23 32SJD620_013
Seat Belts In most European Countries there is When properly worn, seat belts:
Your vehicle is equipped with seat a law covering the use of seat belts.
belts in all seating positions. Please take time to familiarize Keep you connected to the vehicle
yourself with the legal requirements so you can take advantage of the
Your seat belt system also includes of the countries in which you will vehicles built-in safety features.
an indicator on the instrument panel drive.
and a beeper to remind you and your Help protect you in almost every
passengers to fasten your seat belts. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
Why Wear Seat Belts Not wearing a seat belt rollovers.
Seat belts are the single most properly increases the
effective safety device for adults and chance of serious injury or Help keep you from being thrown
larger children. (Infants and smaller death in a crash, even though against the inside of the vehicle
children must be properly restrained your vehicle has airbags. and against other occupants.
in child restraint systems.)
Be sure you and your Keep you from being thrown out
Not wearing a seat belt properly passengers always wear seat of the vehicle.
increases the chance of serious belts and wear them properly.
injury or death in a crash, even Help keep you in a good position
though your vehicle has airbags. should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.

06/10/30 16:43:30 32SJD620_014
Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:

completely protect you in every Seat belts are designed to bear upon
crash. But in most cases, seat belts the bony structure of the body, and
can reduce your risk of serious should be worn low across the front
injury. of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
What You Should Do: lap section of the belt across the
Always wear your seat belt, and abdominal area must be avoided.
make sure you wear it properly.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A
slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Belts should not be worn with straps

twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be used

by one occupant; it is dangerous to
put a belt around a child being carried
on the occupants lap.

06/10/30 16:43:37 32SJD620_015
Airbags
Your vehicle has a Supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
Restraint System (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver and the front outer seat heads of the driver, the front outer
chests of the driver and front seat passenger during a moderate to seat passenger and the rear outer
passengers during a moderate to severe side impact (see page 28 for seat passengers. (See page 29 for
severe frontal collision (see page more information on how your side more information on how your side
27 for more information on how airbags work). curtain airbags work.)
your front airbags work).

06/10/30 16:43:44 32SJD620_016
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright, and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel while allowing full
They are designed to supplement control of the vehicle. The front Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. passengers should move their seat system can prevent all injuries or
as far back from the dashboard as deaths that can occur in severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear possible. crashes, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

06/10/30 16:43:53 32SJD620_017
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction 1.Close the Doors 2.Adjust the Front Seats

The following pages provide After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors and the
protect the driver, adult passengers, tailgate are closed.
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive Your vehicle has a door-
or ride in the front. open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
See pages 32 38 for important specific door or the tailgate is not
guidelines on how to properly tightly closed.
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your See page 77 for how the door-open
vehicle. indicator works.
Adjust the drivers seat as far to the

rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have front passengers adjust their
seats as far to the rear as possible.
If you sit too close to the steering

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

06/10/30 16:44:01 32SJD620_018
In addition to adjusting the seat, you 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

can adjust the steering wheel up and
down, and in and out (see page 95 ). Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
If you cannot get far enough away injury or death if the front
from the steering wheel and still airbags inflate.
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some Always sit as far back from
type of adaptive equipment may help. the front airbags as possible.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
Adjust the drivers seat-back to a
See page 108 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
front seats. leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
centre of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-

backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:44:10 32SJD620_019
4.Adjust the Head Restraints When you use the rear seat, adjust
the head restraint to the highest
Reclining the seat-back too position by pulling it upward. You
far can result in serious injury cannot use this head restraint in the
or death in a crash. lower position.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well
back in the seat. Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
Reclining a seat-back so that the seriously injured in a crash.
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupants chest Make sure head restraints are
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the drivers head restraint so in place and positioned
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against properly before driving.
of sliding under the belt in a crash the centre of the restraint.
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable Properly adjusted head restraints
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints will help protect occupants from
properly as well. Taller persons whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 108 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible. See page 110 for how to adjust the
head restraints.

06/10/30 16:44:18 32SJD620_020
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the
injuries in a crash. seat belts can cause serious
injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder

belt again to remove any slack, then
check that the belt rests across the
centre of your chest and over your
shoulder. CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:44:26 32SJD620_021
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats,
properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the
RELEASE BUTTONS belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
The front outer passenger seat and Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits
the drivers seat have adjustable seat soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways,
belt anchors. To adjust the height of or puts one or both feet up, the
the anchor, press and hold the See page 21 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
release buttons and slide the anchor information about your seat belts greatly increased.
up or down as needed (it has four and how to take care of them.
positions). In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

06/10/30 16:44:33 32SJD620_022
If a front outer seat passenger leans Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
sideways and his head is in the upright and adjust the seat as far
deployment path of the side airbag, back as possible while allowing full
an inflating side airbag can strike the control of the vehicle. When riding
passenger with enough force to very as a front passenger, adjust the seat
seriously injure him. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back your doctor if its okay for you to
in the seat, with your feet on If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
the floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

06/10/30 16:44:42 32SJD620_023
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects
luggage area or on top of a folded- occupant comfort or reposition the on the covers marked SRS
down back seat. All passengers shoulder part of a seat belt can AIRBAG could interfere with
must sit in locked, upright seats reduce the protective capability of the proper operation of the
and be properly restrained by seat the seat belt and increase the airbags or be propelled inside
belts. chance of serious injury in a crash. the vehicle and hurt someone if
the airbags inflate.
Passengers should not stand up or Do not place hard or sharp objects
change seats while the vehicle is between yourself and a front Do not attach hard objects on or
moving. A passenger who is not airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a
or emergency stop can be thrown a pipe or other sharp object in cup holder or other hard object
against the inside of the vehicle, your mouth, can result in injuries attached on or near the door
against other occupants, or out of if your front airbag inflates. could be propelled inside the
the vehicle. vehicle and hurt someone.
Keep your hands and arms away
Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your Do not put a coat hanger or hard
same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an objects on a coat hook. This could
could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured result in injuries if your side
crash. if the airbag inflates. curtain airbag inflates.

06/10/30 16:44:50 32SJD620_024
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If you do not fasten your seat belt Lap/Shoulder Belt
Your seat belt system includes lap/ before the beeper stops, the
shoulder belts in all six seating indicator will stop blinking but SHOULDER UPPER SEAT
PORTION BELT ANCHOR
positions. The front seat belts are remain on. If you continue driving
also equipped with automatic seat without fastening your seat belt, the
belt tensioners. indicator will start blinking again and
the beeper will sound at regular LATCH
The seat belt system intervals. PLATE
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
BUCKLE LAP PORTION
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) without fastening your belt, a The lap/shoulder belt goes over
beeper will sound and the indicator your shoulder, across your chest,
will blink. The beeper will stop after and across your hips.
several seconds, but the indicator
will stay on until the drivers seat belt To fasten the belt, insert the latch
is fastened. plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 17 for how to
properly position the belt).
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:44:58 32SJD620_025
To unlock the belt, press the red The seat belts in all rear seating
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide positions and the front centre seat
the belt across your body so that it have an additional lockable retractor
retracts completely. After exiting the that must be activated to secure a
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the child restraint (see page 52 ).
way and will not get closed in the
door. If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
All seat belts have an emergency retractor will activate. The belt will
locking retractor. In normal driving, retract, but it will not allow the
the retractor lets you move freely in passenger to move freely.
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision To deactivate the lockable retractor, DETACHABLE ANCHOR
or sudden stop, the retractor unlatch the buckle and let the seat
automatically locks the belt to help belt fully retract. To refasten the The lap/shoulder belt in the rear
restrain your body. seat belt, pull it out only as far as centre seat is equipped with a
needed. detachable anchor that has two
parts: a small latch plate and an
anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should

normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 117 .

06/10/30 16:45:08 32SJD620_026
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners If a side or side curtain airbag Seat Belt Maintenance
deploys during a side impact, the For safety, you should check the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle condition of your seat belts regularly.
will also deploy.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
The tensioners can also be activated frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a collision in which the front that the latches work smoothly and
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the the belts retract easily. If a belt does
airbags would not be needed, but the not retract easily, cleaning the belt
additional restraint could be helpful. may correct the problem (see page
292 ). Any belt that is not in good
OUTER LAP PRETENSIONER
When the tensioners are activated, condition or working properly will
: For some types the seat belts will remain tight until not provide good protection and
they are unbuckled. should be replaced as soon as
For added protection, the front seat possible.
belts are equipped with automatic The SRS indicator will
seat belt tensioners. When activated, come on if there is a WARNING: No modifications or
the tensioners immediately tighten problem with your automatic seat additions should be made by the user
the belts to help hold the driver and belt tensioners (see page 30 ). which will either prevent the seat belt
the front passengers in position. adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
The tensioners are designed to assembly from being adjusted to remove
activate in any collision severe slack.
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:45:14 32SJD620_027
If a seat belt is worn during a crash, WARNING: It is essential to replace

it must be replaced by the dealer. A the entire assembly after it has been
belt that has been worn during a worn in a severe impact even if damage Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level to the assembly is not obvious. seat belts can result in
of protection in a subsequent crash. serious injury or death if the
WARNING: Care should be taken to seat belts do not work
The dealer should also inspect the avoid contamination of the webbing with properly when needed.
anchors for damage and replace polishes, oils and chemicals, and
them if needed. If the automatic seat particularly battery acid. Cleaning may Check your seat belts
belt tensioners activate during a safely be carried out using mild soap and regularly and have any
crash, they must be replaced. water. The belt should be replaced if problem corrected as soon as
webbing becomes frayed, contaminated possible.
or damaged.

06/10/30 16:45:21 32SJD620_028
Anchorage Points
(Front Outer Seat) (Front Centre Seat) (Rear Seat)
When replacing the seat belts, make The rear seat has three lap/shoulder
certain to use the anchorage points belts.
shown in the illustrations.

06/10/30 16:45:30 32SJD620_029
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Two side curtain airbags, one for An indicator on the instrument
Your airbag system includes: each side of the vehicle. The panel that alerts you to a possible
airbags are stored in the ceiling problem with your airbags,
Two SRS (supplemental restraint above the side windows. The front sensors, or seat belt tensioners
system) front airbags. The drivers and rear pillars on both sides are (see page 30 ).
airbag is stored in the centre of marked SIDE CURTAIN
the steering wheel; the front AIRBAG (see page 29 ). Emergency backup power in case
passengers airbag is stored in the your vehicles electrical system is
dashboard. Both are marked SRS Automatic front seat belt disconnected in a crash.
AIRBAG (see page 27 ). tensioners (see page 23 ).
Two side airbags, one for the Sensors that can detect a
driver and one for the front outer moderate to severe front impact or
passenger. The airbags are stored side impact.
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE A sophisticated electronic system
AIRBAG (see page 28 ). that continually monitors
information about the sensors, the
control unit, and the airbag
activators when the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position.

06/10/30 16:45:38 32SJD620_030
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
while the tensioner tightens and
locks the seat belt to help keep you
in place, and the airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally

inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
If you ever have a moderate to threshold, that determines whether After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will or not the airbags will deploy. In immediately deflate, so they wont
detect the vehicles rapid such cases, the seat belt will provide interfere with the drivers visibility,
deceleration. sufficient protection, and the or the ability to steer or operate
supplemental protection offered by other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high the airbag would be minimal.
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the drivers and front
passengers front airbags, and
activate the automatic seat belt
tensioners.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:45:46 32SJD620_031
The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags How Your Side Airbags Work
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbags surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection.
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If you ever have a moderate to
with a little less force. severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the drivers or the passengers
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.

06/10/30 16:45:54 32SJD620_032
Only one airbag will deploy during a How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passengers
side impact. If the impact is on the Work side, the passengers side curtain
passengers side, the passengers airbag will inflate even if there are no
side airbag will deploy even if there occupants on that side of the vehicle.
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants
side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit
should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.
upright and well back in their seats.
If a front outer seat passenger leans

sideways and his head is in the
deployment path of the side airbag, SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
he can be seriously injured by an
inflating side airbag. An inflating In a moderate to severe side impact,
side airbag can strike the child with sensors will detect rapid acceleration
enough force to kill or very seriously and signal the control unit to
injure a child. For the information of instantly inflate the side curtain
the side airbags hazards, see pages airbag and activate the seat belt
36 and 60 . tensioner on the drivers or the
passengers side of the vehicle.

06/10/30 16:46:05 32SJD620_033
How the SRS Indicator Works If you see any of these indications, Airbag Service
The SRS indicator alerts the airbags and seat belt tensioners Your airbag systems and automatic
you to a potential problem may not work properly when you seat belt tensioners are virtually
with your airbags or seat belt need them. maintenance free, and there are no
tensioners. parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
When you turn the ignition switch to vehicle serviced if:
the ON (II) position, this indicator Ignoring the SRS indicator
comes on for several seconds then can result in serious injury or An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
goes off. This tells you the system is death if the airbag systems or that has deployed must be
working properly. tensioners do not work replaced along with the control
properly. unit and other related parts. Any
If the indicator comes on at any seat belt tensioner that activates
other time, or does not come on at all, Have your vehicle checked by must also be replaced.
you should have the system checked a dealer as soon as possible if
by your dealer. For example: the SRS indicator alerts you Do not try to remove or replace
to a possible problem. any airbag by yourself. This must
If the SRS indicator does not come be done by an authorized dealer or
on after you turn the ignition a knowledgeable body shop.
switch to the ON (II) position.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
If the indicator stays on after the problem. Take your vehicle to an
engine starts. authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
If the indicator comes on or indication, your airbags may not
flashes on and off while you drive. operate properly.

06/10/30 16:46:11 32SJD620_034
Handling is allowed by trained Additional Safety Precautions Do not expose the front seat-backs
personnel only. It is prohibited to Do not attempt to deactivate your to liquid. If water or another liquid
remove the airbag unit/belt- airbags. Together, airbags and soaks into the seat-back, it can
tensioner from the vehicle. In case of seat belts provide the best prevent the side airbag system
malfunction, shutdown or after protection. from working properly.
airbag inflation/belt-tensioner
operation you have to ask a qualified Do not tamper with airbag and Do not cover or replace seat-back
shop for repair or removal. automatic seat belt tensioner covers without consulting your
components or wiring for any dealer. Improperly replacing or
reason. Tampering could cause covering front seat-back covers
the airbags and automatic seat belt can prevent your side airbags from
tensioners to deploy, possibly inflating during a side impact.
causing very serious injury.

06/10/30 16:46:20 32SJD620_035
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are
they are either unrestrained or not unrestrained or improperly
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle restrained can be seriously
accidents are the number one cause injured or killed in a crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in an approved
deaths and injuries, infants and child restraint system. A
children should be properly larger child should be
restrained when they ride in a properly restrained with a
Children depend on adults to protect vehicle. seat belt and use a booster
them. However, despite their best seat if necessary.
intentions, many adults do not know Infants and small children must be
how to properly protect child restrained in an approved child
passengers. restraint system that is properly Larger children must be restrained
secured to the vehicle (see pages with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
If you have children, or ever need to 39 59 ). a booster seat until the seat belt fits
drive with a child in your vehicle, be them properly (see pages 60 64 ).
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

06/10/30 16:46:29 32SJD620_036
In most countries, child restraint All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passengers Front Airbag
systems must meet the Seat Poses Serious Risks
specifications of the ECE 44 According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to
regulation. children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this,
In many countries, the law requires back seat. It is recommended that all the passengers front airbag is quite
children younger than 12 years of children age 12 and under be large, and it can inflate with enough
age and less than 150 cm (60 in) in properly restrained in a back seat. force to cause very serious injuries.
height to be secured in an officially
approved and suitable child restraint In this vehicle, small or larger Infants
system. In those countries, officially children may also be restrained in Never put a rearward facing child
approved and suitable child restraint the front centre seat. When using a restraint system in the front seats of
systems must therefore be used in front facing child restraint system in a vehicle equipped with a passengers
order to transport a child on any the front centre seat, position the front airbag. If the airbag inflates, it
passenger seat whatsoever. Please seat to its rearmost. Never put a can hit the back of the child restraint
check your local legal requirements. rearward facing child restraint system with enough force to kill or
system in any front seat. very seriously injure an infant.
Children who ride in back are less

likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:46:39 32SJD620_037
As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passengers front airbag Larger Children
inflates, it can hit the rearward Children who have outgrown child
facing child restraint system with restraint systems are also at risk of
great force. The rearward facing being injured or killed by an inflating
child restraint system can be passengers front airbag. Whenever
dislodged or struck with enough possible, larger children should sit in
force to cause very serious injury to the back seat, in a booster seat if
the infant. needed, and be properly restrained
with a seat belt (see page 60 for
Small Children important information about
Placing a front facing child restraint protecting larger children).
DO NOT place rear-facing system in the front seats of a vehicle
child seat on this seat with equipped with a passengers front In this vehicle, larger children may
airbag. airbag can be hazardous. If the also be restrained in the front centre
vehicle seat is too far forward, or the seat. When using a front facing child
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY childs head is thrown forward restraint system in the front centre
can occur. during a collision, an inflating front seat, position the seat to its rearmost.
airbag can strike the child with
enough force to kill or very seriously In all cases observe the legal
injure a small child. requirements of the countries in
which you will drive.
In this vehicle, small children may
also be restrained in the front centre
seat. When using a front facing child
restraint system in the front centre
seat, position the seat to its rearmost.

06/10/30 16:46:45 32SJD620_038
On some types As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;

To remind you of the passengers
front airbag hazards, your vehicle
has warning labels on the
windscreen, on the front passengers
doorjamb, and on the sun visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Extreme Hazard!
DO NOT place rear-facing Do not use a rearward facing

child seat on this seat with child restraint on a seat
airbag. protected by an airbag in
front of it!
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
can occur.

06/10/30 16:46:54 32SJD620_039
The Side Airbag Poses Serious If You Must Drive with Several
Risks Children
Side airbags have been designed to Your vehicle has three seating
help protect adults in a moderate to positions in the back seat and one
severe side impact. front centre seat where children can
If any part of a childs body is in the be properly restrained. If you ever
path of a deploying airbag, an have to carry a group of children,
inflating side airbag can strike the and a child must ride in the front
child with enough force to kill or outer seat:
very seriously injure a child. Leaning over the front door
can result in serious injury or Place the largest child in the front
To remind you of the side airbags death if the side airbag outer seat, provided the child is
hazards, your vehicle also has the inflates. large enough to wear the lap/
safety label on each front doorjamb. shoulder belt properly (see page
Always sit upright with their 60 ).
back against the seat-back.
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 14 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
17 ).

06/10/30 16:47:03 32SJD620_040
If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions Use the childproof door locks to
Attention Never hold an infant or child on prevent children from opening the
Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a rear doors. This can prevent
an infant or a small child in the front seat belt in crash, you could be children from accidentally falling
passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the out (see page 101 ).
child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a WARNING: Use the main power
seat belt, the child can be torn window switch to prevent children
Placing a child in the front outer seat from your arms and be seriously from opening the windows. Using this
exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed. feature will prevent children from
frontal collision or a side impact, and playing with the windows, which
placing in the front centre seat Never put a seat belt over yourself could expose them to hazards or
distracts the driver from the and a child. During a crash, the distract the driver (see page 123 ).
important tasks of driving, putting belt could press deep into the child
both of you at risk. and cause serious or fatal injuries. WARNING: Always take the ignition
key with you whenever you leave the
If a child requires close physical Never let two children use the vehicle alone (with other occupants).
attention or frequent visual contact, same seat belt. If they do, they
we strongly recommend that another could be very seriously injured in a
adult ride with the child in the back crash.
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:47:10 32SJD620_041
Lock all doors and the tailgate Do not leave children alone in a Never let children kneel on seats or
when your vehicle is not in use. vehicle. Leaving children without stand while the vehicle is in motion.
Children who play in vehicles can adult supervision is illegal in some The violent forces created during
accidentally get trapped inside. countries and can be very emergency braking will cause the
Teach your children not to play in hazardous. children to be thrown forward. The
or around vehicles. children could be seriously injured or
For example, infants and small killed.
Make sure any unused seat belt children left in a vehicle on a hot
that a child can reach is buckled, day can die from heatstroke. A
the lockable retractor is activated, child left alone with the key in the
and the belt is fully retracted and ignition switch can accidentally set
locked. If a child wraps a loose the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat belt around their neck, they injuring themselves or others.
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 53 and 55 for how to Keep vehicle keys/remote
activate and deactivate the transmitters out of the reach of
lockable retractor.) children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.

06/10/30 16:47:19 32SJD620_042
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Only a rearward facing child Rearward Facing Child Restraint
restraint system provides proper System Placement
support for a babys head, neck and In this vehicle, a rearward facing
back. child restraint system can be placed
in any seating position in the back
Two types of restraints may be used: seat, but not in the front. Never put a
a restraint system designed rear-facing child restraint system in
exclusively for infants, or a the front seats.
convertible restraint system used in
the rearward facing, reclining mode. For EU countries, an approved
rearward facing child restraint
For EU countries, refer to page system should be placed in any
46 for the recommended child seating position in the back seat (see
restraint system. page 46 ).
Child Restraint System Type
An infant must be properly Do not put a rearward facing child If the passengers front airbag
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining restraint system in a forward-facing inflates, it can hit the back of the
child restraint system until the child position. If placed facing forward, an restraint with enough force to kill or
reaches the restraint system makers infant could be very seriously injured seriously injure an infant.
weight or height limit for the during a frontal collision.
restraint system, and the child is at
least one year old.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:47:26 32SJD620_043
When properly installed, a rearward As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;

facing child restraint system may
prevent the driver or a front Placing a rearward facing
passenger from moving their seat as child restraint system in the
far back as recommended, or from front seats can result in
locking their seat-back in the desired serious injury or death if the
position. passengers front airbag
inflates.
In either situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the Always place a rearward
child restraint system directly facing child restraint system
behind one of the front passenger in the back seat, not the front. DO NOT place rear-facing
seats, move the front seat as far child seat on this seat with
forward as needed, and leave it airbag.
unoccupied. Or you may wish to
get a smaller child restraint DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
system. can occur.
If the passengers front airbag

inflates, it can hit the rearward
facing child restraint system with
great force. The rearward facing
child restraint system can be
dislodged or struck with enough
force to cause very serious injury to
the infant.

06/10/30 16:47:35 32SJD620_044
Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small Child Restraint System Placement
child uses the child restraint system We recommend placing a front
as long as possible, until the child facing child restraint system in a
reaches the weight or height limit back seat or the front centre seat.
for the restraint system.
Placing a front facing child restraint
For EU countries, refer to page system in the front outer seat of a
46 for the recommended child vehicle equipped with a passengers
restraint system. airbag can be hazardous. If the front
outer seat is too far forward, or the
childs head is thrown forward
during a collision, an inflating airbag
can strike the child with enough
force to cause very serious or fatal
Child Restraint System Type injuries.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child
restraint system makers weight and
height limits, should be restrained in
a front facing, upright child restraint
system.
Of the different restraint systems

available, we recommend those that
have a five-point harness system as
shown. CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:47:40 32SJD620_045
In this vehicle, small or larger If it is necessary to put a front facing

children may also be restrained in child restraint system in the front,
the front centre seat. move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible, and be sure the
When a small child is restrained in child restraint system is firmly
the front centre seat, position the secured to the vehicle and the child
seat to its rearmost. However we is properly strapped in the restraint
recommend putting children at the system.
back to avoid possible distraction to
the driver.
Placing a front facing child

restraint system in the front
outer seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a front

facing child restraint system
in front outer seat, move the
vehicle seat to its rearmost,
and properly restrain the
child.

06/10/30 16:47:48 32SJD620_046
Selecting a Child Restraint System
When buying a child restraint We also recommend selecting a Whatever type of child restraint you
system, you need to choose either a lower anchorages system-compatible choose, to provide proper protection,
conventional child restraint system, child restraint system with a rigid, a child restraint system should meet
or one designed for use with the rather than a flexible, anchor (see three requirements:
lower anchorages and tethers. page 47 ).
1. The child restraint system should
Conventional child restraint systems In EU countries, a child restraint meet safety standards. In most
must be secured to a vehicle with a system with a flexible anchor is not countries, child restraint systems
seat belt, whereas lower anchorages available. must meet the specifications of
system-compatible child restraint the ECE 44 regulation. Look for
systems are secured by attaching the In seating positions and vehicles not the approval mark on the system
restraint to hardware built into the equipped with lower anchorages, a and the manufacturers statement
two outer seating positions in the lower anchorages system-compatible of compliance on the box.
back seat and the front centre seat. child restraint system can be
installed using a seat belt. The manufacturer of the vehicle
Since lower anchorages system- does not assume any responsibility
compatible child restraint systems for damage which would be caused
are easier to install and reduce the by a defect inherent in the
possibility of improper installation, recommended child restraint system.
we recommend selecting this style.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:47:53 32SJD620_047
Selecting a Child Restraint System
2. The child restraint system should Before purchasing a conventional

be of the proper type and size to fit child restraint system, or using a
the child. previously purchased one, we
Rearward facing for infants, front recommend that you test the
facing for small children. restraint system in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
Make sure the restraint system fits where the child restraint system will
your child. Check the manufacturers be used.
instructions and labels for height and
weight limits. For EU countries, refer to page
46 for the recommended child
3. The child restraint system should restraint system.
fit the vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

06/10/30 16:48:02 32SJD620_048
Installing a Child Restraint System
After selecting a proper child 2. Make sure the child restraint 3. Secure the child in the back seat.
restraint system and a good place to system is firmly secured. After Make sure the child is properly
install the restraint system, there are installing a child restraint system, strapped in the child restraint
three main steps in installing the push and pull the restraint system system according to the child
restraint system: forward and from side-to-side to restraint system makers
verify that it is secure. instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child restraint properly secured in a child
system to the vehicle. All child A child restraint system secured restraint system can be seriously
restraint systems must be secured with a seat belt should be installed as injured in a crash.
to the vehicle with the lap part of a firmly as possible. However, it does
lap/shoulder belt or with the lower not need to be rock solid. Some The following pages provide the
anchorages system. A child whose side-to-side movement can be recommended child restraint
restraint system is not properly expected and should not reduce the systems for EU countries and
secured to the vehicle can be child restraint systems effectiveness. guidelines on how to properly install
endangered in a crash. a child restraint system. A front
If the child restraint system is not facing child restraint system is used
If you use a lap/shoulder belt secure, try installing it in a different in all examples, but the instructions
without an additional lockable seating position, or use a different are the same for a rearward facing
retractor, be sure you install a style of child restraint system that child restraint system.
locking clip on the seat belt (see can be firmly secured.
page 56 ).
For EU countries, refer to page
46 for the recommended child
restraint system.

06/10/30 16:48:14 32SJD620_049
Child Restraint System for EU Countries

There are many different child restraint systems available. Not all are suitable for use with your vehicle. Please refer
to the table below showing which category of child restraint system can be used for each seating position.
Seating Position
Mass Group Front Passenger Rear Passenger
Outboard Centre Outboard Centre
group 0 Up to 10 kg X X Honda BABY-SAFE Honda BABY-SAFE
group 0 Up to 13 kg X X IL (Honda BABY-SAFE ISO Honda BABY-SAFE
FIX) or Honda BABY-SAFE
group I 9 kg to 18 kg UF IUF (Size class A, B1, B) IUF (Size class A, B1, B) or Honda LORD
or Honda LORD Honda LORD
group II 15 kg to 25 kg UF Honda KID Honda KID Honda KID
group III 22 kg to 36 kg UF Honda KID Honda KID Honda KID
IL: Suitable for particular ISO FIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this table.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group
IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass
group
X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
: Move the front seat to its rearmost position.
If you intend to use a universal category ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system, please refer carefully to the size
class as indicated on the packaging and labelling of the child restraint. Only size classes A, B1 and B are suitable for
use with your vehicle. Do not use size class C, D, E, F or G restraints.
The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts which are available from your dealer.
06/10/30 16:48:20 32SJD620_050
Your vehicle is equipped with lower Installing a Child Restraint

anchorages at the outer seating System with the Lower
The use of any child restraint positions on the rear seat and the Anchorages
system which is not suitable front centre seat. These anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with lower
for your vehicles would not are only to be used with a child anchorages at the outer rear seats
properly secure the infant or restraint system designed to be and the front centre seat. These
child who could therefore be attached to the lower anchorages. anchorages are located between the
killed or seriously injured. Refer to the next column for how to seat-back and seat bottom, and are to
install a child restraint system to the be used only with a child restraint
lower anchorages. system designed for use with the
lower anchorages.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:48:28 32SJD620_051
Front Centre Seat Rear Seat To install a child restraint system

designed to be attached to the lower
anchorages:
1. If you install the child restraint

system to the front centre seat,
position the rear centre seat at
least one position back. Then,
position the front centre seat to its
rearmost position.
LOWER ANCHORAGES LOWER ANCHORAGES For more information about the

front centre seat, see page 109 .
The location of each lower For EU countries, refer to page
anchorage is indicated by a small 46 for the recommended child 2. Move the seat belt buckle or
button above the anchorage point. restraint system. centre seat belt away from the
lower anchorages.
3. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchorages that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child restraint system
and the anchorages.

06/10/30 16:48:37 32SJD620_052
LOWER ANCHORAGE Rigid type
GUIDE-CUP GUIDE-CUP
4. On some child restraint systems Attach the guide-cups to the lower 5. Place the child restraint system on
You may use optional guide-cups anchorages as shown in the the vehicle seat, then attach the
that came with your child restraint illustration. child restraint system to the lower
system to install it to the lower anchorages according to the child
anchorages without damaging the When using the guide-cups, always restraint system makers
seat surface. follow the child restraint system instructions.
manufacturers instructions.
Some child restraint systems
designed for use with lower
anchorages have a rigid-type
connector as shown above.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:48:44 32SJD620_053
Flexible type
6. Whatever type you have, follow ATTACHING CLIP
the child restraint system makers
instructions for adjusting or
tightening the fit.
Flexible type child restraint

system is available in some
countries. In EU countries, this
type is not available.
ANCHOR FITTING
Other child restraints have a flexible- 7. Attach the attaching clip to the
type connector as shown above. anchor fitting, making sure the
strap is not twisted.
The above illustration shows how

the attaching clip should be routed
in EU countries.

06/10/30 16:48:52 32SJD620_054
9. Push and pull the child restraint

ATTACHING CLIP system forward and from side-to-
ATTACHING side to verify that it is secure.
CLIP
The design and suitability of the
child restraint systems must be
carefully checked with the child
restraint system manufacturer
concerned and the seller of those
systems. If you are not sure, consult
your dealer before purchasing this
ANCHOR FITTING ANCHOR FITTING type of child restraint system.
On some models 8. Tighten the tether strap according

Lift the head restraint, then route to the child restraint system
the tether strap over the seat-back makers instructions.
and through the head restraint legs.

06/10/30 16:49:00 32SJD620_055
Installing a Child Restraint The procedures in the following

System with a Lap/Shoulder Belt SEAT BELT pages are described based on a child
When not using the lower restraint system available in EU
anchorages system, all child countries.
restraint systems must be secured to
the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ 1. Place the child restraint system in
shoulder belt. the desired back seating position
or front centre position. Make
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in sure the child restraint is
the back seating positions and the positioned well back in the seat-
front centre seat have a lockable LABEL back.
retractor that must be activated to
secure a child restraint system. If you install the child restraint
The seat belt with a lockable system to the front centre seat,
retractor has a label as shown in the position the rear centre seat at least
illustration above. one position back. Then, position the
front centre seat to its rearmost
To properly route a lap/shoulder belt position.
through a child restraint system,
follow the restraint system makers
instructions.
For EU countries, refer to page

46 for installing a child restraint
system.

06/10/30 16:49:08 32SJD620_056
2. Route the belt through the 3. To activate the lockable retractor, 4. Push down the tab. Route the
restraint according to the restraint slowly pull the shoulder part of the shoulder part of the belt into the
system makers instructions, then belt all the way out until it stops. slit at the side of the restraint,
insert the latch plate into the then let the belt feed back into the
buckle. retractor.
5. After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:49:13 32SJD620_057
To remove slack, it may help to put

weight on the child restraint system,
or push on the back of the restraint
system while pulling up on the belt.
6. After confirming that the belt is 7. Secure the belt in the slit by
locked, grab the shoulder part of pushing up the tab. Make sure the
the belt near the buckle, and pull belt is not twisted and it is
up to remove any slack from the positioned properly in the slit.
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child restraint system will not
be secure.

06/10/30 16:49:19 32SJD620_058
To deactivate the lockable retractor

LOCKING CLIP
and remove a child restraint system,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
8. Push and pull the child restraint When you secure a child restraint
system forward and from side-to- system with a lap/shoulder belt, be
side to verify that it is secure sure you install a locking clip on the
enough to stay upright during seat belt (see page 56 ).
normal driving manoeuvres. If the
child restraint system is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.

06/10/30 16:49:29 32SJD620_059
Using a Seat Belt Locking Clip To install a locking clip, do the

LOCKING CLIP
On vehicles without lockable retractor following:
fitted to the seat where the child is
positioned 1. Place the child restraint in the seat
Always use a seat belt locking clip with a lap/shoulder belt. Route the
when you secure a child restraint lap/shoulder belt through the
system to your vehicle with a lap/ restraint according to the seat
shoulder belt. This helps prevent the manufacturers instructions.
restraint system from shifting
position or overturning. 2. Insert the latch plate into the
buckle. Pull on the shoulder part
A locking clip is usually included of the belt to make sure there is
with the child restraint system. If no slack in the lap portion.
you need a clip, contact the seats 4. Install the locking clip as shown.
manufacturer or a store that sells 3. Tightly grasp the belt near the Position the clip as close as
child restraints. latch plate. Pinch both parts of the possible to the latch plate.
belt together so they wont slip
If it is necessary to put a front facing through the latch plate. Unbuckle 5. Insert the latch plate into the
child restraint system in the front, the seat belt. buckle. Push and pull on the child
move the vehicle seat as far to the restraint system to verify that it is
rear as possible, be sure the child held firmly in place. If it is not,
restraint system is firmly secured to repeat these steps until the
the vehicle, and the child is properly restraint is secure.
strapped in the restraint system (see
page 41 ).

06/10/30 16:49:37 32SJD620_060
Installing a Child Restraint (Front Centre Seat) (Rear Seat)

System with a Tether
Children riding in vehicles should be
restrained to minimize the risk of
injury in the event of an accident.
ANCHOR POINT ANCHOR POINTS
A child restraint system with a tether Since a tether can provide additional
can be installed in the two outer back security to the lap/shoulder belt
seats and the front centre seat, using installation, we recommend using a
one of the anchor points shown in tether whenever one is required or
the illustrations. available. (The owners may check
with the child restraint system
maker to determine whether a tether
is available for a particular child
restraint system.)
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:49:46 32SJD620_061
Using an Anchor Fitting
ATTACHING CLIP ATTACHING CLIP
ATTACHING
CLIP
ANCHOR FITTING ANCHOR FITTING ANCHOR FITTING
1. After properly securing the child On some models 2. Attach the attaching clip to the
restraint system (see page 47 ), Lift the head restraint, then route anchor fitting, making sure the
route the tether strap over the the tether strap over the seat-back strap is not twisted.
seat-back and on both sides of the and through the head restraint legs.
head restraint as shown. 3. Tighten the tether strap according
to the child restraint system
The above illustration shows how makers instructions.
the tether strap should be routed
in EU countries.

06/10/30 16:49:52 32SJD620_062
To attach the tether to the child WARNING: Child restraint anchorages

restraint system, follow the child are designed to withstand only those
restraint system makers instructions. loads imposed by correctly fitted child Make sure the seat-backs are
restraints. Under no circumstances are latched securely before
When the child restraint system is they to be used for adult seat belts, driving.
used, follow the instructions that harnesses or for attaching other items
came with the child restraint system. or equipment to the vehicle.

06/10/30 16:49:56 32SJD620_063
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the

recommended weight or height limit
for a front facing child restraint Allowing a larger child age 12 Leaning over the front door
system, the child should sit in the or under to sit in front outer can result in serious injury or
back seat on a booster and wear a seat can result in injury or death if the side airbag
lap/shoulder belt. death if the passengers front inflates.
airbag inflates.
The following pages give Always sit upright with their
instructions on how to check proper If a larger child must ride in back against the seat-back.
seat belt fit, what kind of booster front outer seat, move the
seat to use if one is needed, and vehicle seat to its rearmost,
important precautions for a child use a booster seat if needed,
who must sit in front. have the child sit up properly
and wear the seat belt
properly.

06/10/30 16:50:07 32SJD620_064
Checking Seat Belt Fit 3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat
between the childs neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as

possible, touching the childs
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay

seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these

questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a front
properly fits a child, have the child facing child restraint system should
put on the seat belt, then ask ride in the back seat or front centre
yourself: seat, and use a booster seat until the
lap/shoulder belt fits them properly
1. Does the child sit all the way back without the booster.
against the seat?
2. Do the childs knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:50:13 32SJD620_065
Booster seats can be high-back or A child may continue using a booster

low-back. Whichever style you select, seat until the tops of their ears are
make sure the booster seat meets even with the top of the vehicles or
approved safety standards (see page boosters seat-back. A child of this
43 ) and that you follow the booster height should be tall enough to use
seat makers instructions. the lap/shoulder belt without a GUIDE
booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster must
ride in front outer seat, move the For EU countries, refer to page
vehicle seat to its rearmost, and be 46 for the booster seat placement.
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A back-rest may be available for a

specific booster seat. Install the
back-rest to the booster seat and
adjust it to the vehicle seat according
to the booster seat makers
instructions. Make sure the seat belt
is properly routed through the guide
at the shoulder of the back-rest and
the belt does not touch and cross the
childs neck (see page 17 ).

06/10/30 16:50:22 32SJD620_066
When Can a Larger Child Sit in The side airbag also poses risks. If Physical Size
Front any part of a larger childs body is in Physically, a child must be large
It is recommended that all children the path of a deploying side airbag, enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
ages 12 and under be properly the child could receive possibly properly fit (see pages 17 and 60 ). If
restrained in the back seat or front serious injuries. the seat belt does not fit properly,
centre seat. with or without the child sitting on a
Of course, children vary widely. And booster seat, the child should not sit
The back seat is the safest place for while age may be one indicator of in front.
a child of any age or size. The front when a child can safely ride in front,
centre seat is as safe as the back seat, there are other important factors you Maturity
however we recommend positioning should consider. To safely ride in front, a child must
children in the back to avoid possible be able to follow the rules, including
distraction to the driver. sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If the passengers front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:50:31 32SJD620_067
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a childs comfort or
Carefully read the owners manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the childs seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Remind the child not to lean crash.
toward the door.
Supervise the child. Even mature

children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

06/10/30 16:50:40 32SJD620_068
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicles exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicles
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. kill you. and set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Set the fan speed to high.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.

06/10/30 16:50:50 32SJD620_069
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations EXPANSION TANK CAP DANGER LABEL SRS AIRBAG
shown. They warn you of potential (Diesel models) (Right-hand drive type)
hazards that could cause serious SRS AIRBAG
injury or death. Read these labels (Left-hand drive type) CHILD SAFETY
carefully. CHILD SAFETY SRS AIRBAG (Right-hand drive type)
(Left-hand drive type)
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your dealer for a
replacement.
The label shown below is attached to

the back of the bonnet.
SRS Airbag
SRS Airbag
Safety alert symbol

SIDE AIRBAG
SRS AIRBAG
Follow service manual
instructions carefully
RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL BATTERY DANGER LABEL
(Petrol models)

06/10/30 16:50:59 32SJD620_070
Safety Labels
The label shown below is attached to The label shown below is attached to On diesel models
each front doorjamb. the centre sunvisor. Symbols on top of the
engine under the engine cover are to
remind you to follow the service
manual instructions. When replacing
the injectors, your authorized Honda
dealer should perform this work.
Contact your Honda dealer.
Move the front centre seat

Side Airbag to the rearmost position
before installing the child
restraint system (mass
group I)
Safety alert symbol Location of the front centre

seat
Follow owner s manual Follow owners manual

instructions carefully instructions carefully

06/10/30 16:51:02 32SJD620_071
68
06/10/30 16:51:06 32SJD620_072
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Temperature Gauge .................... 82 Head Restraints ......................... 110
the controls and displays that Fuel Gauge ................................... 83 Rear Seat Armrest ..................... 111
contribute to the daily operation of Information Display..................... 83 Rear Seat Adjustments ............. 112
your vehicle. All the essential Controls Near the Steering Reclining the Front Seats ......... 113
controls are within easy reach. Wheel ............................................ 85 Folding the Rear Seats .............. 115
Windscreen Wipers and Detachable Anchor.................... 117
Washers ........................................ 87 Seat Heaters ................................... 119
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 90 Tonneau Cover............................... 120
Daytime Running Lights............. 90 Headlight Adjuster ........................ 122
Front and Rear Fog Lights ............. 91 Power Windows ............................. 123
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 93 Sunroof ............................................ 125
Rear Window Demister .................. 94 Mirrors ............................................ 126
Hazard Warning Button .................. 94 Parking Brake ................................ 128
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 95 Interior Convenience Items .......... 130
Keys and Locks ................................ 96 Glove Box ................................... 131
Immobilizer System......................... 97 Cushion Tray.............................. 131
Ignition Switch ................................. 98 Beverage Holders ...................... 132
Door Locks ....................................... 99 Drivers Pocket .......................... 132
Control Locations ............................ 70 Power Door Locks ....................... 99 Centre Pocket ............................ 133
Instrument Panel ............................. 72 Childproof Door Locks ............. 101 Seat Under Box .......................... 133
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 74 Tailgate ........................................... 102 Coat Hooks ................................. 134
Gauges .............................................. 81 Remote Transmitter ...................... 104 Vanity Mirror ............................. 134
Speedometer ................................ 81 Seats ................................................ 108 Cigarette Lighter ....................... 134
Tachometer .................................. 81 Front Seat Adjustments ............ 108 Ashtray........................................ 135
Outside Temperature Drivers Seat Manual Height Accessory Power Socket .......... 135
Indicator .................................... 82 Adjustment ............................. 110 Interior Lights ................................ 136
Instruments and Controls 69

06/10/30 16:51:14 32SJD620_073
Control Locations
Left-hand drive type INSIDE MIRROR RAINFALL SENSOR1 (P. 88)

(P. 126) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 148)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS(P. 72, 73) CLOCK (P. 174)
GAUGES
(P. 81)
DOOR LOCK TAB

(P. 99) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 140)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION3
MIRROR (P. 204)
CONTROLS AUTOMATIC
(P. 126) TRANSMISSION2
(P. 207)
PARKING BRAKE
FUEL FILL DOOR HANDLE3
RELEASE HANDLE (P. 128)
(P. 185)
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE (P. 186) PARKING BRAKE PEDAL2 (P. 129) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK1 (P. 176)
1 : For some types

70 Instruments and Controls

06/10/30 16:51:21 32SJD620_074
Control Locations
Right-hand drive type

RAINFALL SENSOR1 (P. 88) INSIDE MIRROR (P. 126)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 148) INDICATORS (P. 72, 73)
CLOCK (P. 174) GAUGES (P. 81)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 140)
MANUAL DOOR LOCK TAB
TRANSMISSION3 (P. 99)
(P. 204)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION2
(P. 207) MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P. 126)
PARKING BRAKE
HANDLE3 (P. 128)
FUEL FILL DOOR
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK1 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL2 BONNET RELEASE HANDLE RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 176) (P. 129) (P. 186) (P. 185)
1 : For some types


06/10/30 16:51:29 32SJD620_075
Instrument Panel (Petrol models)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P. 77)

FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P. 77) INDICATOR (P. 75) (P. 76)
LIGHTS ON LOW FUEL INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) INDICATOR (P. 76)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 79)
(P. 78) IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 76)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) INDICATOR
(P. 30, 75)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR (P. 77)
VSA ACTIVATION CRUISE CONTROL

INDICATOR INDICATOR (P. 77)
(P. 78)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR (ABS) INDICATOR (P. 76)
LOW OIL PRESSURE LAMP (P. 74, 314)
INDICATOR (P. 74, 312) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR CHARGING SYSTEM SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 75, 317)
(P. 74, 313) INDICATOR (P. 74, 314)
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P. 77)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 78)
: For some types

06/10/30 16:51:38 32SJD620_076
Instrument Panel (Diesel models)
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 75)
(P. 77)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 76)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST REAR FOG LIGHT HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P. 76)
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR INDICATOR (P. 77)
(P. 78) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P. 79)
IMMOBILIZER
SUPPLEMENTAL SYSTEM INDICATOR
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (P. 76)
(SRS) INDICATOR
(P. 30, 75)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR (P. 77)
VSA ACTIVATION CRUISE CONTROL

INDICATOR INDICATOR (P. 77)
(P. 78)
GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

LOW OIL PRESSURE (P. 79) (ABS) INDICATOR (P. 76)
INDICATOR (P. 74, 312) DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
OIL LEVEL (DPF) INDICATOR (P. 80, 338) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 75, 317)
INDICATOR (P. 74, 313)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P. 77)
(P. 74, 315)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 78)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 74, 314)
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER INDICATOR (P. 80)
: For some types

06/10/30 16:51:51 32SJD620_077
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Oil Level Indicator Do not confuse these two different
indicators to give you important (Amber) indicator meanings.
information about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on amber
when the engine is running, the
Malfunction Indicator engine oil level is low. You should
Lamp check the oil level and add engine oil. If you ignore the oil level indicator
See page 314 on petrol models, For more information, see page 313 . and keep driving with this indicator
315 on diesel models. on, you can seriously damage the
This indicator is used for 2 purposes. engine.
On diesel models
This indicator will also come on 1. Amber light Low oil level as Charging System
when you restart the engine after described above. Indicator
your vehicle has run out of fuel (see If this indicator comes on when the
page 284 ). 2. Red light Low oil pressure. If engine is running, the battery is not
the indicator comes on red, there being charged. For more information,
Low Oil Pressure may be serious engine damage. see page 314 .
Indicator (Red)
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator comes on red and
flashes or stays on when the engine
is running. For more information,
see page 312 .

06/10/30 16:52:00 32SJD620_078
Seat Belt Reminder Supplemental Restraint Parking Brake and

Indicator System Indicator Brake System Indicator
The seat belt system includes an This indicator comes on several This indicator has two functions:
indicator on the instrument panel seconds when you turn the ignition
and a beeper to remind you and your switch to ON (II). If it comes on at 1. It comes on when you turn the
passengers to fasten your seat belts. any other time, it indicates a ignition switch to the ON (II)
potential problem with your front position. It is a reminder to check
If you turn the ignition switch to ON airbags or automatic seat belt the parking brake. A beeper
(II) before fastening your seat belt, tensioners. This indicator will also sounds if you drive with the
the beeper sounds several seconds alert you to a potential problem with parking brake not fully released.
and the indicator flashes. If you do your side airbags or side curtain Driving with the parking brake not
not fasten your seat belt before the airbags. For more information, see fully released can damage the
beeper stops, the indicator stops page 30 . brakes and tyres.
flashing but remains on.
2. If it remains lit after you fully
If you continue driving without release the parking brake while
fastening your seat belt, the beeper the engine is running, or if it
sounds and the indicator flashes comes on while driving, there
again at regular intervals. could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 317 .

06/10/30 16:52:08 32SJD620_079
Immobilizer System Anti-lock Brake System Lights On Indicator

Indicator (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few This indicator normally comes on for This indicator reminds you that the
seconds when you turn the ignition a few seconds when you turn the exterior lights are on. It comes on
switch to the ON (II) position. It will ignition switch to the ON (II) when the light switch is in either the
go off if you have inserted a position, and when the ignition or position. If you turn the
properly-coded ignition key. If it is switch is turned to the START (III) ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
not a properly-coded key, the position. If it comes on at any other (I) or the LOCK (0) position without
indicator will blink and the engine time, there is a problem with the turning off the light switch, this
will not start (see page 97 ). ABS. If this happens, have your indicator will remain on. A reminder
vehicle checked at a dealer. With chime will also sound when you open
This indicator also blinks several this indicator on, your vehicle still the drivers door without the key in
times when you turn the ignition has normal braking ability but no the ignition switch.
switch from the ON (II) position to anti-lock function. For more
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) information, see page 215 . High Beam Indicator
position.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 90 .

06/10/30 16:52:22 32SJD620_080
Front Fog Light Door-open Indicator

Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning (For some types) This indicator comes on if any door
Indicators This indicator comes on when you or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
The left or right turn signal indicator turn on the front fog lights. See page
blinks when you signal a lane change 91 for information on operating the Cruise Main Indicator
or turn. If the indicators do not blink front fog lights. (For some types)
or blink rapidly, it usually means one This indicator comes on when you
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out Rear Fog Light Indicator turn on the Cruise Control System
(see pages 260 and 263 ). Replace (For some types) by pressing the Master Button (see
the bulb as soon as possible, since This indicator comes on when you page 179 ).
other drivers cannot see that you are turn on the rear fog light. See page
signaling. 91 for information on operating the Cruise Control Indicator
rear fog light. (For some types)
When you press the hazard warning This indicator comes on when you
button, both turn signal indicators set the cruise control. See page
and all turn signals on the outside of 179 for information on operating the
the vehicle flash. cruise control.

06/10/30 16:52:33 32SJD620_081
Security System Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator

(For some types) (VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions:
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) 1. It comes on as a reminder that you
position. have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
when you turn the ignition switch to page 217 ).
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take 3. It comes on along with the VSA
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR your vehicle to a dealer to have it system indicator if there is a
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle problem with the VSA system.
This indicator comes on when the still has normal driving ability, but
security system is set. See page will not have VSA traction and This indicator normally comes on for
177 for more information on the stability enhancement. See page a few seconds when you turn the
security system. 217 for more information on the ignition switch to the ON (II)
VSA system. position. See page 217 for more
information on the VSA system.

06/10/30 16:52:41 32SJD620_082
Low Fuel Indicator When the indicator comes on, there Glow Plugs Indicator
is about 8.5 (2.25 US gal, 1.87 Imp (On diesel models)
gal) of fuel remaining in the tank This indicator comes on for a few
before the reading reaches 0. There seconds when you turn the ignition
is a small reserve of fuel remaining switch to the ON (II) position. When
in the tank when the reading does the engine is cold, wait for the
reach 0. indicator to go off before starting the
engine.
On diesel models
Refer to Priming the Fuel System If this indicator blinks while the
on page 284 if your vehicle runs out engine is running, there is a problem
of fuel. in the engine control system. This
LOW FUEL INDICATOR indicator may also blink when you
restart the engine after your vehicle
This indicator is located in the fuel has run out of fuel. For more
gauge. It comes on as a reminder information, see pages 304 and 316 .
that you must refuel soon.

06/10/30 16:52:49 32SJD620_083
Water In Diesel Filter Diesel Particulate Filter If you ignore the indicator blinking,
Indicator (DPF) Indicator it stops blinking, then stays on. If
(On diesel models) (On some Diesel models) this happens, take your vehicle to a
This indicator normally comes on for If this indicator blinks while the Honda dealer as soon as possible to
a few seconds when you turn the engine is running, the diesel have the DPF system checked. If
ignition switch to the ON (II) particulate filter (DPF) should be you ignore this indicator and
position. regenerated to remove the continue driving, the DPF and your
accumulated particulate matter (PM). vehicles emission control systems
If this indicator comes on and stays will be seriously damaged. For more
on while the engine is running, there To regenerate the DPF, when traffic information of the DPF system, see
is a risk of damage to the injection allows, maintain a vehicle speed of at page 338 .
system. Contact your dealer as soon least 60 km/h (37 mph) and continue
as possible. to drive until the indicator goes out
(it may take about 15 minutes). This
will increase the exhaust
temperature and help to burn and
remove the PM from the DPF.

06/10/30 16:52:55 32SJD620_084
Gauges
Speedometer
This shows your speed in kilometers
TEMPERATURE GAUGE per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
(mph) and kilometers per hour
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE (km/h) depending on the type.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
INFORMATION DISPLAY

06/10/30 16:53:04 32SJD620_085
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is Temperature Gauge

This indicator displays the outside incorrectly displayed, you can adjust This shows the temperature of the
temperature in Centigrade. it up to 3C warmer or cooler. engines coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
The temperature sensor is located in NOTE: The temperature must be about the middle of the gauge. In
the front bumper. Therefore, the stabilized before doing this severe driving conditions, such as
temperature reading can be affected procedure. very hot weather or a long period of
by heat reflection from the road sur- uphill driving, the pointer may rise
face, engine heat, and the exhaust Press the Select/Reset knob for 10 into the upper half of the gauge. If it
from the surrounding traffic. This seconds. The following sequence will reaches the red (hot) mark, pull in
can cause the temperature reading appear for one second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, safely to the side of the road. Turn to
not to be correct when your speed is 3, 2, 1, 0, 1. page 308 on petrol models and page
under 30 km/h (19 mph). 310 on diesel models for instructions
When the temperature reaches the and precautions on checking the
desired value, release the Select/ engine cooling system.
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,

temperature readings near freezing
(0C) could mean that ice is forming
on the road surface.

06/10/30 16:53:13 32SJD620_086
Gauges
Fuel Gauge Information Display Odometer

This shows how much fuel you have. The information display provides The odometer shows the total
It may show slightly more or less various information; odometer, number of kilometers or miles your
than the actual amount. The needle outside temperature, trip meter, and vehicle has been driven.
returns to the bottom after you turn average fuel mileage. To switch the
off the ignition. display, press the Select/Reset knob Trip Meter
repeatedly. When you turn the The trip meter shows the number of
ignition switch to the ON (II) kilometers or miles driven since you
position, what you last selected is last reset it.
On petrol models shown on the information display.
Avoid driving with an extremely low To reset a trip meter, display it and
fuel level. Running out of fuel could then press the Select/Reset knob
cause the engine to misfire, until the number resets to 0.0.
damaging the catalytic converter.
On diesel models
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on or the glow plugs indicator
will blink when you restart the
engine after your vehicle has run out
of fuel.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:53:18 32SJD620_087
Gauges
Average Fuel Mileage Range

Fuel Mileage Display (mpg or in This shows the estimated distance
liters/100 km) depends on models. you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
The average fuel mileage will be estimated from the fuel economy
reset when you reset the trip meter, you received over the last several
or if the vehicles battery goes dead kilometres, so it will vary with
or is disconnected. changes in speed, traffic, etc.

06/10/30 16:53:25 32SJD620_088
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/TURN WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS REAR WINDOW

SIGNALS (P. 90) (P. 87) DEMISTER (P. 94)/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS2/ MIRROR HEATERS
REAR FOG LIGHT (P. 91) BUTTON (P. 127)
HAZARD WARNING
POWER WINDOW BUTTON (P. 94)
SWITCHES
(P. 123)
SEAT HEATER
REMOTE AUDIO SWITCHES2
CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P. 119)
(P. 176)
HEADLIGHT
ADJUSTER
(P. 122)
HORN1
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS2

(VSA) OFF SWITCH (P. 218) (P. 95) (P. 179)
Left-hand drive type
2 : For some types CONTINUED
06/10/30 16:53:33 32SJD620_089
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
REAR WINDOW REMOTE AUDIO HEADLIGHTS/TURN WINDSCREEN WIPERS/

DEMISTER (P. 94)/ CONTROL BUTTONS3 SIGNALS1 (P. 90) WASHERS1 (P. 87)
MIRROR HEATERS (P. 176) FRONT FOG LIGHTS3/
BUTTON (P. 127) REAR FOG LIGHT3 (P. 91)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 123)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P. 94)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS3
(P. 179)
HEADLIGHT
ADJUSTER3
(P. 122)
HORN2 STEERING WHEEL VEHICLE STABILITY

SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES3 (P. 119) ADJUSTMENT ASSIST (VSA) OFF
Right-hand drive type (P. 95) SWITCH (P. 218)
1 : Except for European models, these switches change locations with each other.
3 : For some types
06/10/30 16:53:46 32SJD620_090
Windscreen Wipers and Washers
Windscreen Wipers 1. MIST AUTO The wipers operate

2. OFF automatically, see page 88 for
3. INT Intermittent more information.
AUTO Automatic Intermittent
4. LO Low speed LO The wipers run at low speed.
5. HI High speed
6. Windscreen washers HI The wipers run at high speed.
: On some models Windscreen Washers Pull the

wiper control lever toward you,
Push the lever up or down to select a and hold it. The washers spray
position. until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
MIST The wipers run at high complete one more sweep after
speed until you release the lever. you release the lever.
OFF The wipers are not activated. Headlight Washer

(If equipped)
INT The wipers operate every When you pull back on the wiper
few seconds. control lever with the headlight
switch ON, the headlight washers
On some models and windscreen washers work at the
Vary the delay by turning the same time.
INT TIME ring. The headlight washers use the same
On some models
fluid reservoir as the windscreen
washers. CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:53:55 32SJD620_091
Automatic Intermittent Wipers RAINFALL SENSOR

On some models
The automatic intermittent wiper
system senses rainfall and
automatically turns on the
windscreen wipers. To enable
sensing, push the lever down to
select AUTO.
When the system senses rainfall, it

turns on the windscreen wipers and
AUTO SENSITIVE RING
varies their speed (intermittent, low
speed, or high speed) depending on
how hard it is raining. You can adjust the sensitivity of the The rainfall sensor is located in the
system by turning the AUTO windscreen near the rearview mirror.
When the wiper lever is in the LO sensitive ring on the wiper lever. If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,
(low speed) or HI (high speed) dust, etc., the wipers may not
position, the windscreen wipers run Turning the ring anticlockwise: operate properly or may operate
at that speed. Automatic sensing is Lowers sensitivity against rainfall. unexpectedly.
disabled. Turning the ring clockwise:
Heightens sensitivity against rainfall.

06/10/30 16:54:05 32SJD620_092
Rear Window Wiper and Washer 4. Rotate the switch anticlockwise to

spray the window washer without
Do not put the lever in the AUTO activating the wiper.
position when driving through a car
wash. Turn off this system when not When you shift the transmission to
in use. the reverse position with the front
windscreen wipers activated, the
If you try to clean the windscreen rear window wiper operates
around the rainfall sensor using a automatically.
cloth soaked with water with the
ignition switch in the ON (II) When the front windscreen wiper
position and the wiper switch in the control lever is positioned as follows:
AUTO position, the wiper may
operate unexpectedly and you may INT The rear window wiper
get injured. Make sure to turn off 1. Rotate the switch clockwise to operates intermittently.
the wipers before you wash your turn the rear window wiper ON.
vehicle. It operates intermittently. LO or HI The rear window wiper
operates continuously.
2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
3. OFF

06/10/30 16:54:15 32SJD620_093
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal Push down or up on High Beams Push the lever

the lever to signal a turn. To signal a forward until you hear a click. The
lane change, push lightly on the high beam indicator will come on
lever in the proper direction and hold (see page 76 ). Pull the lever back to
it. The lever will return to centre return to the low beams.
when you release it or complete a
turn. To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
Headlights On Turning the The high beams will stay on as long
switch on the lever to the as you hold the lever back.
position turns on the position lights,
tail-lights, instrument panel lights, Daytime Running Lights
and rear licence plate lights. (If equipped)
1. Turn signal The daytime running lights come on
2. Off Turning the switch to the automatically when you turn the
3. Position lights position turns on the headlights. If ignition switch to the ON (II)
4. Headlights on you leave the lights on with the key position. They go out automatically
5. High beams removed from the ignition switch, when the light switch is ON.
6. Flash high beams you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the drivers door.
When the light switch is in the

or the position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.

06/10/30 16:54:25 32SJD620_094
Front and Rear Fog Lights
Rear Fog Light You can turn off the rear fog light Front and Rear Fog Lights
(For some types) with the headlights on by turning the (For some types)
switch up again.
The rear fog light will go off when

you turn the headlights off. To turn
the rear fog light on again, you have
to turn the rear fog lamp switch
again with the headlights on.
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
The rear fog light switch is located The fog light switch is located next
next to the light control switch. You to the light control switch. You can
can use the rear fog light when the control the front and rear fog lights
headlights are on (the light control with this switch when the light
switch is in the position). control switch is in the or the
position.
To operate the rear fog light, turn
the switch up from the off ( )
position. The indicator in the
instrument panel comes on to
indicate that the rear fog light is on. CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:54:35 32SJD620_095
Front and Rear Fog Lights
To turn on the rear fog light only, The front and rear fog lights will go
turn the switch down from the off off when you turn the headlights off
( ) position when the light control without turning the fog light switch
switch is in the position. The off.
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on to indicate that the When you turn the headlights on
rear fog light is on. again, the front fog lights will also
turn on. To turn the fog lights
You can turn off the rear fog light completely off, turn the fog light
with the headlights on by turning the switch down to the off ( ) position.
switch down again.
To turn the rear fog light on again,
To operate the front fog lights, turn you have to turn the fog light switch
the switch up from the off ( ) to the position with the
position to the position when headlights ( position) or the
the light control switch is in the front fog lights on.
or the position. The
indicator comes on as a
reminder. To turn the rear fog light
on with the front fog lights, turn the
switch one position up from the
position.
You can turn off the rear fog light
only by turning the switch up again.

06/10/30 16:54:42 32SJD620_096
Instrument Panel Brightness
The instrument panel brightness

dims when you turn the light control
switch to the or position to
reduce glare at night. To cancel it,
turn the Select/Reset knob fully to
the right until you hear a beep.
You can adjust the brightness to the

desired level with the headlight
switch off, and also with the
headlight switch on. Both settings
SELECT/ RESET KNOB BRIGHTNESS LEVELS will remain at those levels until you
change them.
The knob on the instrument panel The brightness can be shown within
controls the brightness of the the six brightness levels on the
instrument panel lights. Turn the information display. When you turn
knob to adjust the brightness. the knob, the information display
changes to circles that show you the
current level. You will hear a beep
when you reach the maximum or
minimum brightness. The display
returns to the odometer/trip meter
values 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting the knob.

06/10/30 16:54:50 32SJD620_097
Rear Window Demister, Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Demister The demister will shut off when you Hazard Warning Button
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position. You have
to turn the demister on again when
you restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear

and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The demister wire on the inside of

the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
The rear window demister will clear Push the button next to the shift
fog, frost, and thin ice from the The power mirror heaters turn on or lever to turn on the hazard warning
window. Turn the ignition switch to off too, by pushing the demister lights (four-way flashers). This
the ON (II) position. Push the button (see page 127 ). causes all outside turn signals and
demister button to turn it on and off. both turn indicators in the
The indicator in the button comes on instrument panel to flash. Use these
to show the demister is on. lights to give a warning to other road
users that your vehicle is causing a
hazard.

06/10/30 16:54:57 32SJD620_098
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 2. Move the steering wheel up or

before you start driving. down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
Adjusting the steering wheel indicators.
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of 3. Push the lever up to lock the
the vehicle and be seriously steering wheel in position.
injured in a crash.
4. Make sure you have securely
Adjust the steering wheel locked the steering wheel in place
only when the vehicle is by trying to move it up, down, in,
stopped. 1. Push the lever under the steering and out.
column all the way down.

06/10/30 16:55:06 32SJD620_099
Keys and Locks
KEY NUMBER IGNITION KEYS You should have received a key These keys contain electronic
TAG WITH REMOTE number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
TRANSMITTER need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.
Remote Transmitter Protect the keys from direct

Your two ignition keys are also fitted sunlight, high temperature, and
with remote transmitters; see page high humidity.
104 for an explanation of the
operation. Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Two ignition keys come with your Keep the keys away from liquids.
vehicle. You should keep one of If they get wet, dry them
them in a safe place, away from the immediately with a soft cloth.
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

06/10/30 16:55:15 32SJD620_100
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your (EU models)
your vehicle from theft. If an keys coding if another immobilizer EC Directives
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key This immobilizer system complies
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
start. you insert the key. and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment and the mutual
When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not recognition of their conformity)
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer recognize the coding of your key, Directives.
system indicator should come on for contact your dealer.
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the This indicator also blinks several
system does not recognize the times when you turn the ignition
coding of the key. Turn the ignition switch from the ON (II) position to
switch to the LOCK (0) position, the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn position.
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again. Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and you

cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.

06/10/30 16:55:25 32SJD620_101
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition
to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open
you turn the key. the drivers door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) You can
operate the audio system and the On vehicles with manual transmission
cigarette lighter in this position.
ON (II) This is the normal key Removing the key from the
position when driving. Several of the ignition switch while driving
indicators on the instrument panel locks the steering. This can
The ignition switch has four come on as a test when you turn the cause you to lose control of
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY ignition switch from the the vehicle.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position. Remove the key from the
LOCK (0) You can insert or ignition switch only when
remove the key only in this position. On some types, the headlights come parked.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If on automatically in this position (see
your vehicle has an automatic page 90 ).
transmission, the shift lever must If your vehicle has an automatic
also be in park. START (III) Use this position transmission, the shift lever must be
only to start the engine. The switch in Park before you can remove the
returns to the ON (II) position when key from the ignition switch.
you let go of the key.

06/10/30 16:55:33 32SJD620_102
Door Locks
Power Door Locks To lock any passengers door when

getting out of the vehicle, pull the
RED INDICATOR lock tab out and close the door. To
lock the drivers door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
outside door handle and pull the lock
tab out. Release the handle, then
Lock close the door.
When you lock the doors and the

tailgate with the key or the remote
Unlock transmitter, all outside turn signals
KEY and both indicators in the instrument
panel flash three times to verify the
Each door has a lock tab next to the All doors and the tailgate lock or doors and the tailgate are locked and
inside door handle. When you pull unlock when you use the key to lock the security system (if equipped) has
out or push in the lock tab on the or unlock the drivers door. set. When you unlock them, these
drivers door, all doors and the lights flash once.
tailgate lock or unlock. The lock tab
on each passengers door only locks
and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, the red

mark on the lock tab is shown.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:55:42 32SJD620_103
Door Locks
On vehicles with security system Super Locking With the super locking set, the lock
The security system activates after (For some types) tabs on all doors are disabled.
you lock the doors and the tailgate
with the lock tab on the drivers door You can also set the super locking
while pulling the outside door handle, with the remote transmitter. To set it,
and then close the door (see page push the LOCK button twice within
177 ). 5 seconds (see page 105 ).
Lockout Prevention To cancel the super locking, unlock

If you forget and leave the key in the the drivers door with the key or the
ignition switch, lockout prevention remote transmitter.
will not allow you to lock the drivers
door. If you try to lock an open
drivers door by pulling the lock tab
out with the outside handle pulled,
the tabs on all doors pop out when The super locking helps to protect
you close the drivers door. your vehicle and valuables from theft.
To set the super locking, turn the
key towards the front of the vehicle
twice within 5 seconds.
The super locking will not set if any

door or the tailgate is not fully closed.
It will be set even if the bonnet, any
window or the sunroof is open.

06/10/30 16:55:49 32SJD620_104
Door Locks
On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor Childproof Door Locks

Only the remote transmitter can
If there are persons inside the reset the security system. Unlocking
vehicle with the super the drivers door with the key
locking set, they cannot activates the alarm. UNLOCK
unlock the door from the
inside. If you set the super locking with the
windows open, the ultrasonic sensor
Make sure there is no person may activate the alarm unexpectedly
inside the vehicle before when the system senses strong LOCK
setting the super locking. vibrations on the vehicle or loud
sound.
The childproof door locks are

designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab in and use
the outside door handle.

06/10/30 16:55:54 32SJD620_105
Tailgate
The tailgate will lock or unlock when Keep the tailgate closed at all times
you lock or unlock the drivers door while driving to avoid damaging the
by using the key, the remote tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
transmitter, or the lock tab on the from getting into the interior. See
drivers door. Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
65 .
HANDLE
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,

then lift up. To close it, press down
on the back edge.

06/10/30 16:55:59 32SJD620_106
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate If you need to unlock the tailgate

manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
COVER
If the power door lock system

cannot unlock the tailgate, unlock
it manually.
1. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver

to remove the cover on the tailgate
lining.
2. Insert the ignition key to the

cylinder, turn the key right to
unlock the tailgate.

06/10/30 16:56:05 32SJD620_107
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK Press this button to If you do not open any door or the
unlock all doors and the tailgate. tailgate within 30 seconds, the doors
LOCK When you push the UNLOCK button, and the tailgate automatically relock
BUTTON
all outside turn signals, and both and the security system (if
indicators in the instrument panel equipped) sets.
flash once.
You cannot unlock the doors and the
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light tailgate if the key is in the ignition
switch is in the door activated switch.
position) will come on when you
UNLOCK press the UNLOCK button. If you do
BUTTON
not open any door or the tailgate, the
light will fade out in about 30
LOCK Press this button to lock seconds, If you relock the doors and
all doors and the tailgate. When you the tailgate with the remote
push the LOCK button, all outside transmitter before 30 seconds have
turn signals and both indicators in elapsed, the light will go off
the instrument panel flash three immediately.
times to verify the doors and the
tailgate are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. You
cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate if any door or the tailgate is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.

06/10/30 16:56:14 32SJD620_108
Remote Transmitter
Super Locking Replacing the Battery

(For some types) When the remote transmitters
The super locking helps to protect If there are persons inside the battery begins to get weak, it may
your vehicle and valuables from theft. vehicle with the super take several pushes on the button to
To set the super locking, push the locking set, they cannot lock or unlock the doors and tailgate,
LOCK button twice within 5 seconds. unlock the door from the and the LED will not light. Replace
inside. the battery as soon as possible.
The super locking will not set if any
door or the tailgate is not fully closed. Make sure there is no person Battery type: CR1616
It will be set even if the bonnet, any inside the vehicle before
window or the sunroof is open. setting the super locking.
To cancel the super locking, push

the UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter, or unlock the drivers
door with the key.
See page 100 for information on the

super locking.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:56:23 32SJD620_109
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the

back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
BATTERY same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
SCREW An improperly disposed of battery

can hurt the environment.
TAB Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad 5. Install the parts in reverse order.
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying

its middle seam with your
fingernail.

06/10/30 16:56:30 32SJD620_110
Remote Transmitter
(EU models) Remote Transmitter Care

EC Directives Avoid dropping or throwing the
This keyless entry system complies transmitter.
with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
and Telecommunications Terminal Protect the transmitter from
Equipment and the mutual extreme temperature.
recognition of their conformity)
Directives. Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the

replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

06/10/30 16:56:38 32SJD620_111
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments Front Outer Seat

See pages 14 16 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.
BAR LEVER
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushions front edge. Move seat cushion.
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
to make sure it is locked in position. rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.

06/10/30 16:56:46 32SJD620_112
Seats
Front Centre Seat It can be also moved by pulling the

lever on the bottom of the seat-back
LEVER while you are sitting in the rear seat.
When the front centre seat is
occupied, do not operate it from the
rear seat side.
If you install the child restraint

system (mass group I) to the front
centre seat, position the rear centre
seat at least one position back. Then,
position the front centre seat to its
LEVER rearmost position. STRAP
To adjust the seat forward or The front centre seat cannot be To change the angle of the seat-back,
backward, pull up on the lever under moved to the rearmost position with pull the strap on the right side of the
the right side of the seat cushions the rear centre seat folded down. seat bottom. Move the seat-back to
front edge. Move the seat to the the desired position and release the
desired position, and release the strap. Let the seat-back latch into the
lever. Try to move the seat to make new position.
sure it is locked in position.

06/10/30 16:56:55 32SJD620_113
Seats
Drivers Seat Manual Height Head Restraints Front

Adjustment See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you RELEASE BUTTON

adjust them so the back of the
LEVER occupants head rests against the The head restraints adjust for height.
centre of the restraint. You need both hands to adjust a
The height of your drivers seat is restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
adjustable. To raise the seat, while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
repeatedly pull up the lever on the To lower the restraint, push the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower release button sideways, and push
the seat, push the lever down the restraint down.
repeatedly.
Make sure to pull the lever upward

or downward to its full range.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.

06/10/30 16:57:03 32SJD620_114
Seats
Rear To remove a head restraint for Rear Seat Armrest

RELEASE BUTTON folding down the rear seat, cleaning (For some types)
or repair, pull it up as far as it will go.
Push the release button and pull the
restraint out of the seat-back.
Always replace the rear head

restraints when the seat-
backs are returned to upright
position.
When you use the rear seat, adjust

the head restraint to the highest
position by pulling it upward. You The rear seat armrest is in the
cannot use this head restraint in the centre of the rear seat. Pivot it down
lower position. to use it.

06/10/30 16:57:10 32SJD620_115
Seats
Rear Seat Adjustments

See pages 14 16 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
LEVER
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
LEVER
To adjust the rear centre seat The angle of each rear seat-back can
forward or backward, pull up on the be adjusted separately. To change
lever under the seat cushions front the seat-back angle of the rear seat-
edge. Move the seat to the desired back, pull up on the release lever on
position, and release the lever. Try to the top of the seat-back. Move the
move the seat to make sure it is seat-back to the desired position,
locked in position. then release the lever. Make sure
the seat-back latches in the new
position.

06/10/30 16:57:19 32SJD620_116
Seats
Reclining the Front Seats
STRAP
RELEASE BUTTON
You can recline the seat-backs on the 1. Remove the head restraints by 2. Pull the strap on the right side of
front seats to a fully flat position so pushing the release buttons and the seat bottom and fold the front
they are level with the rear seat pulling the restraints out (see page centre seat-back forward.
cushions, making a large cushioned 110 ).
area. To do this: When you fold the front centre
seat-back forward, adjust the head
restraint to the lowest position.
The beverage holders must be

folded away when they are not in
use.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:57:25 32SJD620_117
Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the

front seats to the upright position.
Make sure you install the head Make sure the seat-backs are
restraints and the seats are locked latched securely before
securely before driving. driving.
When you return the seat-back to its

upright position, hold the seat-back
to keep it from going up too quickly.
3. Adjust the front outer seats

forward as far as possible. Pull up
the seat-back angle adjustment
lever and pivot the seat-back
backward until it is level with the
rear seat cushion.

06/10/30 16:57:33 32SJD620_118
Seats
Folding the Rear Seats

Each rear seat-back can be folded
down separately to give more
luggage room. With either of the
outer seat-backs folded, you can still
carry a passenger in the rear centre
seat. With the centre seat-back
folded, either rear outer seating
position can be used.
Remove any items from the seat

before folding down the seat-back. CLIP LATCH PLATE
Make sure the outer shoulder belts When you are folding the rear centre
are positioned on each clip whenever seat, use the latch plate to release
the rear outer seat is folded. the centre seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 117 ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it.
Make sure the rear seat armrest is

stored.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:57:42 32SJD620_119
Seats
3. Pull the release lever up to unlatch Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
LEVER the seat-back. Move the seat belt positioned in front of the rear seat-
out of the way and fold the seat- backs and the seat belt buckles are
back down holding it with your on the seat cushion whenever the
hands. seat-back is in its upright position.
The rear centre seat cannot be In the rear centre seating position,
folded unless the front centre seat is be sure the detachable anchor is
in the foremost position. latched securely (see page 117 ).
Reverse this procedure to return the

seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
To fold down the rear seat: before driving.
1. Before folding down the rear seat-

back, move the front centre seat to
the forward most position (see Make sure the seat-backs are
page 109 ). latched securely before
driving.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
their lowest position.

06/10/30 16:57:49 32SJD620_120
Seats
Detachable Anchor When the rear seat is returned to the

The seat belt in the rear centre seat upright position, the detachable
is equipped with a detachable anchor. anchor should be latched back
This allows the centre seat belt to be properly.
unlatched when the rear centre seat
is folded.
Using a seat belt with the

detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a LABEL
crash.
Before using the seat belt, The seat belt with a detachable
make sure the detachable anchor has a label as shown in the
anchor is correctly latched. illustration above.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:57:56 32SJD620_121
Seats
LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE
SMALL LATCH
PLATE
TRIANGLE
SMALL LATCH PLATE MARKS ANCHOR BUCKLE
Pull out the small latch plate and the Line up the triangle marks on the To unlatch the detachable anchor,
latch plate from each holding slot in small latch plate and anchor buckle insert the latch plate into the slot on
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt when reattaching the belt and buckle. the side of the anchor buckle. Store
to extend it. the detachable anchor and seat belt
Tug on the seat belt to verify that latch plates in the retractor housing.
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.

06/10/30 16:58:04 32SJD620_122
Seat Heaters (For some types)
In the HI setting, the heater turns off Follow these precautions whenever
when the seat gets warm, and turns you use the seat heaters:
back on after the seats temperature
drops. Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
In the LO setting, the heater runs large amounts of current from the
continuously. It does not cycle with battery.
temperature changes.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
SEAT HEATERS This can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Both front outer seats are equipped
with seat heaters. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use them. Push the top of
the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the
seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.

06/10/30 16:58:12 32SJD620_123
Tonneau Cover (For some types)
You can use the tonneau cover to REAR SIDE TONNEAU COVER
conceal your parcels and protect
them from direct sunlight.
Do not store parcels on the tonneau

cover. The tonneau cover may break
if weight is placed on it.
FRONT SIDE TONNEU COVER SLOTS
The tonneau cover can be extended To extend the rear side tonneau
forward and rearward separately. cover, pull the covers leading edge
out of its housing and set the
The front side tonneau cover can be mounting rods in the slots.
used separately.
To retract the cover, release the rods
To extend left, centre or right from the slots and guide the cover to
tonneau cover, pull the clips of the roll back fully into its housing.
tonneau cover out of its housing, and
hook the clips on the legs of the rear
head restraint.

06/10/30 16:58:19 32SJD620_124
Tonneau Cover (For some types)
To use the tonneau cover, place one

TONNEAU COVER end into the holder and push the
other end inward and push down
that end into its holder until it locks
into place.
Make sure it is securely latched so it

will not come loose while you are
driving.
To remove the tonneau cover, While the tonneau cover is not in use,
release each side of the cover by place the cover as shown in the
pushing one end of the unit toward illustration.
the other end and lifting it up.

06/10/30 16:58:27 32SJD620_125
Headlight Adjuster (For some types)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER DIAL

0: A driver or a driver and passenger On vehicles with headlights bulbs of
in the front seat. high voltage discharge tube
1: Two persons in front and three Your vehicle is equipped with an
persons in rear seats or six automatic headlight adjusting
persons in the front and rear seats. system that senses changes in the
2: Six persons in the front and rear vehicle posture due to riding and
seats and luggage in the luggage loading conditions of the passengers
area, within the limits of maximum and their luggage and adjusts the
permissible axle weight and vertical angle of the headlights
maximum permissible vehicle automatically.
weight.
3: A driver and luggage in the
luggage area, within the limits of
The vertical angle of the headlights maximum permissible axle weight
can be adjusted according to the and maximum permissible vehicle
number of persons and the loading weight.
weight in the luggage area.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. Turn the adjusting dial
to select an appropriate angle of the
headlights.

06/10/30 16:58:34 32SJD620_126
Power Windows
DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
Closing a power window on windows cannot be raised or lowered.
someones hands or fingers To cancel this feature, push on the
can cause serious injury. switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
Make sure your passengers have children in the vehicle so they
are away from the windows do not injure themselves by
before closing them. operating the windows
unintentionally.
MAIN SWITCH WARNING: Always take the ignition

key with you whenever you leave the
Turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicle alone (with other occupants).
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
The windows will operate for up to

10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 16:58:39 32SJD620_127
Power Windows
AUTO To open or close the AUTO REVERSE If the drivers

drivers window, push or pull the window senses any obstacle while it
window switch firmly down or up to is closing automatically, it will
the second detent, and release it. reverse direction, and then stop. To
The window will automatically go close the window, remove the
down or up all the way. To stop the obstacle, then use the window switch
window, pull or push the window again.
switch briefly.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
To open or close the window window is almost closed. You should
partially, push down or pull back on always check that all passengers and
the window switch lightly to the first objects are away from the window
detent, and hold it. The window will before closing it.
stop when you release the switch.

06/10/30 16:58:46 32SJD620_128
Sunroof (For some types)
On vehicles without navigation system To tilt up the back of the sunroof,

straight up on the centre of the
switch. To close the sunroof, push If you try to open the sunroof in
the switch forward and hold it. To below-freezing temperatures, or
open the sunroof, pull the switch when it is covered with snow or ice,
backward and hold it. you can damage the sunroof panel or
motor.
WARNING: Always take the ignition

Opening or closing the key with you whenever you leave the
sunroof on someones hands vehicle alone (with other occupants).
SUNROOF SWITCH or fingers can cause serious
injury. WARNING: Extending the head, arms
The sunroof can be tilted up in the or other parts of the body through the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid Make sure all hands and sunroof while the vehicle is moving can
back into the roof. Use the switch on fingers are clear of the cause serious injury or death.
the front ceiling to operate the sunroof before opening or
sunroof. You must turn the ignition closing it.
switch to the ON (II) position to
operate the sunroof.

06/10/30 16:58:56 32SJD620_129
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 3. Push the appropriate edge of the
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before (II) position. adjustment switch to move the
you start driving. mirror right, left, up, or down.
2. Move the selector switch to L (left
The inside mirror has day and night side) or R (right side). 4. When you finish, move the
positions. The night position reduces selector switch to the centre (off)
glare from headlights behind you. position. This turns off the
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of adjustment switch to keep your
the mirror to select the day or night settings.
position.

06/10/30 16:59:03 32SJD620_130
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters Folding Door Mirrors Never drive your vehicle with the
(For some types) outside mirrors folded.
FOLDING MIRROR SWITCH
MIRROR HEATERS BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to

remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II) Door mirrors can be folded by the
position, turn on the heaters by folding switch next to the selector
pressing the button. The rear switch, which enables you to park
window demister simultaneously your vehicle in a limited parking
functions, too, by pressing this space easily. Make sure you fold out
button. The indicator in the button the mirrors before you start driving.
comes on as a reminder. Press the With the ignition switch in the ON
button again to turn the heaters off. (II) position, press the folding switch
It also stops the rear window to fold up both outside mirrors simul-
demister. taneously. To fold out, press the
switch again.

06/10/30 16:59:11 32SJD620_131
Parking Brake
Parking Brake Handle The parking brake indicator on the

(On Manual Transmission instrument panel should go out when
Models) the parking brake is fully released
(see page 75 ).
While the parking brake is applied,

the handle will spring back without
pushing the release button if the
handle is pushed in.
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
PARKING BRAKE HANDLE RELEASE BUTTON brakes and axles. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is driven with
To apply the parking brake, firmly To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake on.
pull the parking brake handle toward the handle toward you slightly and
you without pushing the release push and hold the release button,
button. then return the handle.
You will not be able to relock the

parking brake without returning the
lever all the way back.

06/10/30 16:59:17 32SJD620_132
Parking Brake
Parking Brake Pedal

(On Automatic Transmission
Models) Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake on.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page 75 ).

06/10/30 16:59:22 32SJD620_133
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK DRIVERS POCKET

VANITY MIRROR
BEVERAGE HOLDER (DRIVERS SIDE) CENTRE POCKET
VANITY MIRROR
(PASSENGERS SIDE)
ASHTRAY
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET CUSHION TRAY SEAT UNDER BOX CIGARETTE BEVERAGE GLOVE BOX
LIGHTER HOLDER
: For some types

06/10/30 16:59:30 32SJD620_134
Glove Box Cushion Tray
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your STRAP
passenger in a crash, even if
LOCK the passenger is wearing the
seat belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the To use the cushion tray, pull the
handle. Close it with a firm push. strap, and pivot the seat cushion
forward.
You can lock or unlock the glove box
with the ignition key.
The glove box light comes on when

the light control switch is in the
or position.

06/10/30 16:59:38 32SJD620_135
Beverage Holders Drivers Pocket

LID
BEVERAGE HOLDERS DRIVERS POCKET
To open the beverage holder, pull The front centre seat also has two To open the drivers pocket, swing
out the holder by pulling the handle. beverage holders in its seat-back. the lid down. Close it with a firm
Close it with a firm push. Before using it, make sure you fold push.
down the seat-back by pulling the
Be careful when you are using the strap (see page113). To open it, pivot
beverage holders. A spilled liquid the lid up.
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can Fold the beverage holders away
damage the upholstery, carpeting, when returning the seat to the
and electrical components in the upright position to avoid damaging
interior. them.

06/10/30 16:59:46 32SJD620_136
Centre Pocket Seat Under Box

(For some types)
A seat under box is located under To remove the box for cleaning, pull
To open the centre pocket, swing the the front centre seat. To use it, pull upward on the front centre edge to
lid down. Close it with a firm push. upward slightly on the front centre disengage the locking tabs under the
edge of the box, and slide it out. seat bottom, then pull the box out.
Do not try to force the box. You
could damage it.

06/10/30 16:59:54 32SJD620_137
Coat Hooks Vanity Mirror Cigarette Lighter
COAT HOOK
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
To use a coat hook, slide it out Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use The ignition switch must be in the
slightly, then pull it down. it. ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position for the cigarette lighter to
Make sure the coat hooks are pulled On some models work. To heat up the lighter, push it
up when you are not using them. There is also a vanity mirror on the in. It will pop out when it is ready for
These hooks are not designed for passengers side. use. Do not hold the lighter in while
large or heavy items. it is heating up, you could cause it to
overheat.

06/10/30 17:00:03 32SJD620_138
Ashtray Accessory Power Socket

(For some types)
METAL PLATE Use the ashtray only for cigarettes,
cigars, and other smoking materials.
To prevent a possible fire and
damage to your vehicle, dont put
paper or other things that can burn
in the ashtray.
ASHTRAY
Open the ashtray by pulling on the

bottom edge. Push it in to close it. To use the accessory power socket,
To remove the ashtray for emptying, pull up the cover. The ignition switch
push down on the metal plate inside, must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
then pull the ashtray out completely. ON (II) position.
This socket is intended to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.

06/10/30 17:00:13 32SJD620_139
Interior Lights
Ceiling Lights In the door activated position, both The light fades out and it goes off 30
front and rear ceiling lights come on seconds after you close all the doors
when you: or tailgate.
Open any door and tailgate. The light goes off soon after you
lock the drivers door or you turn the
Remove the key from the ignition ignition switch to the ON (II)
switch. If you do not open a door, position.
the light fades out in about 30
seconds. If you leave any door open when the
ON key is not in the ignition switch, the
OFF Unlock the doors with the key or ceiling light will go off after 3
DOOR ACTIVATED remote transmitter. minutes.
Your vehicle has the front and rear

ceiling lights as standard equipment.
Each ceiling light has a three-

position switch; ON, door activated
(centre), and OFF.
In the ON position, the ceiling light

stays on continuously. In the OFF
position, the light does not come on.

06/10/30 17:00:18 32SJD620_140
Interior Lights
Spotlights
On some types On vehicles with sunroof
Turn on each spotlight by pushing

the lens. Push the lens again to turn
it off. You can use the spotlights at
all times.

06/10/30 17:00:24 32SJD620_141
Interior Lights
Ignition Switch Light If you leave the drivers door open

with the key is not in the ignition
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT switch, the ignition switch light will
go off after 3 minutes.
The ignition switch light comes on

when you unlock the drivers door. It
fades out in about 30 seconds after
you close the drivers door, goes off
soon after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, goes
off 30 seconds after you remove the
ignition key, and it goes off soon
after you lock the drivers door.

06/10/30 17:00:29 32SJD620_142
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System ................ 140
vehicle provides a comfortable Automatic Climate Control....... 146
driving environment in all weather Semi-automatic Operation ........ 147
conditions. Sunlight and Temperature
Sensor ..................................... 147
The audio system that is standard Audio System ................................. 148
equipment on some models has Playing the Radio ....................... 148
many features. This section Playing a CD ............................... 161
describes those features and how to CD Changer ............................... 166
use them. (If you selected an Protecting Your CDs ..................... 171
optional audio system, refer to the CD Player Error Massages .......... 172
operating instructions that came CD Changer Error Massages ...... 173
with it.) Setting the Clock ........................... 174
Remote Audio Controls................. 176
On some types Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 176
The security system helps to Security System ............................. 177
discourage vandalism and theft of Cruise Control ................................ 179
your vehicle.
Features 139
06/10/30 17:00:38 32SJD620_143
Climate Control System
Proper use of the climate control Vent Controls

system can make the interior dry
and comfortable, and keep the CENTRE UPPER VENT (Drivers side) CENTRE LOWER VENT
windows clear for best visibility. REAR SEAT
Open
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
Close
FRONT SEAT
The direction of airflow from the The centre lower and corner vents
vents in the centre and each side of can be opened or closed by turning
the dashboard is adjustable. the dial.
To adjust the air flow from each vent,

move the tab up-and-down and side-
to-side.
The centre upper vent can be

switched to use for the front seat or
to use for the rear seat by turning
the dial.
140 Features
06/10/30 17:00:43 32SJD620_144
CORNER VENT (Drivers side)
Close Open
To adjust the airflow from each vent,

move the tab up-and-down and side-
to-side.
Features 141
06/10/30 17:00:48 32SJD620_145
AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON MODE BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
DEMISTER
BUTTON FRESH AIR BUTTON
REAR WINDOW TEMPERATURE FAN CONTROL RECIRCULATION

DEMISTER/MIRROR CONTROL BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
HEATERS BUTTON
142 Features
06/10/30 17:01:00 32SJD620_146
Fan Control Button When you turn the A/C off, the The outside air intakes for the
Push the button to increase the system cannot regulate the inside heating and cooling system are at
fan speed and air flow. Push the temperature if you set the the base of the windscreen. Keep
button to decrease it. temperature control below the this area clear of leaves and other
outside temperature. debris.
Temperature Control Button
Push the button to increase the Rear Window Demister Button The system should be left in fresh
temperature of air flow. Push the This button turns the rear window air mode under almost all conditions.
button to decrease it. When you set demister off and on (see page 94 ). Keeping the system in recirculation
the temperature to its lower limit or mode, particularly with the A/C off,
its upper limit, it will be displayed as Fresh Air and Recirculation can cause the windows to fog up.
Lo or Hi. Buttons
These two buttons control the Switch to recirculation mode when
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button source of air going into the system. driving through dusty or smoky
This button turns the air In fresh air mode , air comes conditions, then return to fresh air
conditioning on and off. You will see from outside the vehicle. In mode.
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. recirculation mode , the
interior air recycles through the
system.
Features 143
06/10/30 17:01:11 32SJD620_147
Mode Control Button Airflow is divided between Ventilation

Use the mode control dial to select the floor vents and demister vents at The flow-through ventilation system
the vents the air flows from. Some the base of the windscreen. draws in outside air, circulates it
air will flow from the dashboard through the interior, then discharges
corner vents in all modes. Air flows from the demister it through vents near the tailgate.
vents at the base of the windscreen.
Air flows from the centre 1. Set the temperature to maximum.
and corner vents in the dashboard. When you select , the system 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
automatically switches to fresh air 3. Select and Fresh Air mode.
Airflow is divided between mode and turns on the A/C. (The 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
the vents in the dashboard and the A/C indicator will not come on in the
floor vents. display).
Air flows from the floor

vents.
144 Features
06/10/30 17:01:22 32SJD620_148
Using the Heater Using the A/C If the interior is very warm, you can
The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load cool it down more rapidly by partially
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine opening the windows, turning on the
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page A/C, and setting the fan to
feel warm air coming from the 82 ). If it moves near the red zone, maximum speed in fresh air mode.
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal. Dehumidify the Interior
1. Select and Fresh Air mode. Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the moisture from the air. When used in
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with button. A/C ON will be displayed combination with the heater, it
the temperature control buttons. on the panel. makes the interior warm and dry.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum heat. 1. Turn the fan on.
3. Select . 2. Turn on the air conditioning.
4. If the outside air is humid, select 3. Select and fresh air mode.
the Recirculation mode. If the 4. Adjust the temperature to your
outside air is dry, select the Fresh preference.
Air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed. This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 0C (32F).
Features 145
06/10/30 17:01:34 32SJD620_149
To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice Automatic Climate Control
To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows The automatic climate control
windows: 1. Select . The system system adjusts the fan speed and
automatically switches to Fresh airflow levels to maintain the interior
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or Air mode and turns on the A/C. temperature you select, and it
high for faster defrosting. (The A/C indicator will not come controls switching fresh air/interior
2. Select . The system on in the display). air recirculation as well.
automatically switches to Fresh 2. Select .
Air mode and turns on the A/C. 3. Set the fan and temperature 1. Press the AUTO button.
(The A/C indicator will not come controls to the maximum level. 2. Set the desired temperature with
on in the display) the temperature control buttons.
3. Adjust the temperature so the To clear the windows faster, you can You will see FULL AUTO in the
airflow feels warm. close the dashboard corner vents by systems display.
4. Select to help clear the rotating the wheel below it. This will
rear window. send more warm air to the The system automatically selects the
5. To increase airflow to the windscreen defroster vents. Once proper mix of conditioned and/or
windshield, close the corner vents. the windscreen is clear, select the heated air to raise or lower the
fresh air mode to avoid fogging the interior temperature to the
When you switch to another mode windows. temperature you selected.
from , the A/C stays on.
(The A/C indicator will not come For your safety, make sure you have If you set the temperature to its
on in the display). Press the A/C a clear view through all the windows lower limit or its highest limit, the
button to turn if off. before driving. system runs at full cooling or heating
only. It does not regulate the interior
temperature.
146 Features
06/10/30 17:01:41 32SJD620_150
In cold weather, the fan will not Sunlight and Temperature

come on automatically until the Sensors
heater starts to develop warm air.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL in the display to go out.
To Turn Everything Off

Press the OFF button. However, a
lack of airflow can cause the The climate control system has two
windows to fog up. You should keep sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
the fan on at all times so stale air and top of the dashboard, and a
moisture do not build up in the temperature sensor is next to the
interior and cause fogging. steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Features 147
06/10/30 17:01:50 32SJD620_151
Audio System
Your vehicle has one of the audio Playing the Radio

systems described in this section.
Read the following pages for A Type SEEK BAR
operation of the audio systems A.SEL SCAN BUTTON
installed in your vehicle. BUTTON
If your vehicle has a different audio

system from these types, read the AM/FM RDS BUTTON
radio manufacturers manual that BUTTON
came with your vehicle for its PWR/VOL TUNE KNOB
operation. KNOB
TA BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
B Type SEEK BAR
A.SEL SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
AM/FM RDS BUTTON

BUTTON
PWR/VOL TUNE KNOB
KNOB
TA BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
148 Features
06/10/30 17:01:54 32SJD620_152
Audio System
C Type PRESET ICON
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
SCAN ICON AUTO SELECT ICON
TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK BAR
TA BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON

RDS BUTTON
Features 149
06/10/30 17:02:01 32SJD620_153
Audio System
To Play the Radio To Select a Station SEEK The seek function

The ignition switch must be in the You can use these five methods to searches up and down from the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on a selected current frequency to find a station
Turn the system on by pushing the band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the with a strong signal. To activate it,
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM preset buttons or preset icons press the or side of the
button. Adjust the volume by turning (models with navigation system), bar, then release it.
the same knob. and AUTO SELECT .
The band and frequency that the TUNE Use the TUNE knob to
radio was last tuned to is displayed. tune the radio to a desired frequency.
To change bands, press the FM/AM Turn the knob right to tune to a
button. On the FM band, ST will be higher frequency, or left to tune to a
displayed if the station is lower frequency.
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
150 Features
06/10/30 17:02:10 32SJD620_154
Audio System
SCAN The SCAN function Preset Each of the six preset 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to store a total
samples all stations with strong buttons or preset icons (on models of each six stations on AM (LW,
signals on the selected band. To with navigation system) can store MW) and twelve stations on FM.
activate it, press the SCAN button or one frequency on AM (LW, MW)
touch the SCAN icon (models with and two frequencies on FM. The preset frequencies may be lost if
navigation system), then release it. your vehicles battery goes dead, is
You will see SCAN in the display. 1. On vehicles with navigation system disconnected, or the radio fuse is
The system will scan for a station Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button removed.
with a strong signal. When it finds to view the audio display. You will
one, it will stop and play that station see the six preset icons.
for about 10 seconds.
2. Select the desired band, AM or
If you do nothing, the system will FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
then scan for the next strong station two sets of FM frequencies with
and play it for 10 seconds. When it the preset buttons (on-screen
plays a station you want to listen to, icons).
press the SCAN button (icon) again.
3. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
4. Pick a preset button (icon), and

hold it until you hear a beep.
CONTINUED
Features 151
06/10/30 17:02:15 32SJD620_155
Audio System
AUTO SELECT If you are If you do not like the stations Auto
travelling far from home and can no Select has stored, you can store
longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset
you can use the auto select feature to buttons (icons). Use the TUNE,
find stations in the local area. SEEK, or SCAN function to find
stations, then store them in the
Press the A.SEL button or the preset buttons (icons) as described
AUTO SELECT icon (models with previously.
navigation system). A.SEL flashes
in the display, and the system goes To turn off Auto Select, press the
into scan mode for several seconds. A.SEL button (AUTO SELECT icon).
It stores the frequencies of six FM This restores the presets you
stations in the preset buttons (icons). originally set.
You will see a 0 displayed after

pressing a preset button (icon) if
Auto Select cannot find a strong
station for every preset button.
152 Features
06/10/30 17:02:21 32SJD620_156
Audio System
Radio Data System (RDS) The RDS function turns on auto- You can turn on or off the RDS
Features matically when you turn the system functions. To switch each function
With your audio system, you can on. If the station you are listening to on or off, press the PWR/VOL knob
utilize many convenient features is an RDS station, the frequency for more than 2 seconds with the
provided by the radio data system display will disappear and the station audio system on. It shows AF, REG,
(RDS). name will be displayed. Then, the PS, A-PI, A-TP, CT (except C type)
system will automatically keep and CLK on the display each time
With the FM band selected, you can selecting the frequency with the you push the TUNE knob. Then,
keep listening to the same station strongest signal from the frequen- turn the TUNE knob left (off) or
even if its frequency changes as you cies that carry the same programs. right (on). To set the RDS functions
enter different regions while you are This can save you the trouble of on or off, press the PWR/VOL knob
travelling. re-tuning to obtain the same station again.
as long as you are in the same RDS
network area.
CONTINUED
Features 153
06/10/30 17:02:30 32SJD620_157
Audio System
AF (Alternative Frequency) AF A-PI (Program Identification When the signals of the RDS station
automatically selects a similar Code) When a similar program is become so weak that the system can
program as the one in play from broadcasted from some radio no longer follow the station, the
another station in the adjacent area. stations in different countries or system will hold the last tuned
areas, it automatically selects only frequency and the display will
REG (Regional Program) With the given program. When the radio change from the station name to the
this function selected, the radio wave the system is receiving frequency.
knows that certain broadcasters do becomes weak, it automatically
not air the same programs at the selects the similar program In some countries, you cannot utilize
same time. In REG mode, the radio broadcasted with the stronger radio features provided by RDS as the
remains tuned into the regional wave from another station. RDS function is not provided for all
program and will not change to stations.
another frequency to compensate for A-TP (Traffic Programs) It
weak reception. automatically tunes in to the radio
station that is broadcasting traffic
PS (Program Service) PS shows information.
the name of the radio station to
which you tuned into. CT (Clock Time) It automatically
puts the clock right based on the
data broadcasted from the radio
station.
CLK (Clock) It switches the

clock display to either the 12-hour
system or the 24-hour system.
154 Features
06/10/30 17:02:38 32SJD620_158
Audio System
Program Service Name Display When a traffic information (TP) mode when the traffic information is
If the station you are listening to is station is selected, TP will light on finished.
an RDS station, the frequency the display indicating that traffic
display will disappear and the station reports can be received from this To adjust the volume of the traffic
name or PTY information will be station. When the EON (Enhanced announcement, turn the PWR/VOL
displayed. Press the RDS button for Other Network) TP station is knob whilst the announcement is
less than 2 seconds to switch the selected, TP will also light on the being broadcast. The volume level
display information between the display. selected will be retained the next
name of network/station and the time a traffic announcement is made.
PTY information (see page 156 for EON information cross-references This will also adjust the volume of
the PTY display information). other program services that PTY NEWS and PTY ALARM
broadcast traffic information, and interruption functions (see page
TA (Traffic Announcement Standby) when EON information is received, 158 ).
Function traffic reports can be received
When the TA button is pressed, through another program service. To turn off the TA function, press
TA will light on the display and the the TA button again. TA will go out
system will stand by for traffic You can receive traffic information from the display.
announcements. while you are listening to a CD. If the
system is tuned to a TP or EON TP If you use SEEK or Auto Select with
station before playing a CD, the the TA function ON, the system
system will stand by for traffic searches only TP or EON TP
announcements by pressing the TA stations.
button (TA indicator ON) and the
system will switch from CD to the
traffic announcement when it begins.
The system will return to the CD CONTINUED
Features 155
06/10/30 17:02:43 32SJD620_159
Audio System
PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs SCIENCE : Programs about nature,
When the RDS button is pressed for expanding upon the news. science, and technology.
less than two seconds, the PTY CLASSICS : Serious classics; SPORT : Programs concerned with
display function turns on. This performances of major orchestral any aspect of sports.
function lets you know the type of works. VARIED : Light entertainment
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned programs.
broadcasting. For example, if the with any aspect of national or
station is broadcasting dramas, regional culture.
DRAMA is shown in the display. If DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
it is a station of scientific programs, EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
SCIENCE will be shown. The EDUCATE : Educational programs.
principal PTYs are shown as follows. INFO : General information and
advice.
L.CLASS : Light classics; classical
music for non-specialist appreciation.
NEWS : Short accounts of facts,
events, publicly expressed views,
reportage, etc.
OTH MUS : Other types of music,
such as Jazz, R & B, Folk, Country,
Reggae.
POP MUS : Commercial music of
popular appeal.
ROCK MUS : Contemporary modern
music.
156 Features
06/10/30 17:02:52 32SJD620_160
Audio System
After you select the desired program While a PTY is displayed, you can After your desired PTY is displayed,
type, the system will search for a use the SEEK bar to find a station of press either side of the SEEK bar
station with the same PTY code as the desired PTY. When you use the again within 5 seconds. The system
the selected program type. When TUNE knob, the display will show will go into the PTY search mode
you use this function for the first different PTYs (see the PTYs list on and it will search for a station of the
time, will appear as it was the previous page). selected PTY. If there is no station
preset at the factory. available in the selected PTY,
The PTY setting mode is cancelled if is displayed for about 5
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds and the PTY search mode is
transmit PTY data, is seconds after selecting the desired cancelled.
displayed. When the selected station PTY by operating the SEEK bar.
is not an RDS station, is Some stations may broadcast the
displayed for about 5 seconds. The programs which have different
PTY display function turns off and contents from their PTY code.
the display returns to normal if no
further steps are taken. In the PTY search mode, the tuning
step is set to 50 kHz while searching
on the FM band. This step changes
to 100 kHz when the AF or TA
function is activated.
CONTINUED
Features 157
06/10/30 17:03:00 32SJD620_161
Audio System
PTY/News Interrupt Function Your audio system has another PTY Alarm
To activate this function, press the interrupt function (including TA PTY code is used for
RDS button for more than 2 seconds function). The interrupt function emergency announcements, such as
and select . The system first activated has priority over the natural disasters. When this code is
will hold the last tuned FM station/ others and the indication of the other received, goes on the
network PTY while you are listening interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
to the CD. With this function on, the activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
playing CD is interrupted and the turn off the currently activated system will return to the normal
system switches from CD mode to interrupt function. operation mode.
the FM newscast when the newscast
is broadcasting from the FM station.
When the program is changed to

another program or the frequency
cannot be received for 10 seconds
due to weak signal, the system will
return to the CD mode automatically.
158 Features
06/10/30 17:03:08 32SJD620_162
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound ( ), maximum, and minimum

Press the TUNE knob repeatedly to of its range.
display the Bass (BASS), Treble
(TREB), Fader (FAD), Balance Speed-sensitive Volume
(BAL), and speed-sensitive volume Compensation (SVC) The SVC
compensation (SVC) settings. mode controls the volume based on
vehicle speed. The faster you go, the
Each mode is shown in the display as louder the audio volume becomes.
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to As you slow down, the audio volume
adjust the setting to your liking. decreases.
Balance/Fader These two The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
modes adjust the strength of the SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
sound coming from each speaker. HIGH. The default setting is MID.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob to
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back adjust the setting to your liking.
strength. If you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
Treble/Bass Use the TREB/ too quiet, choose high.
BASS modes to adjust the tone to
your liking. The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
When the level reaches the centre, mode about 5 seconds after you stop
you will see C in the display. You adjusting a mode.
will also hear a beep whenever the
adjustment level reaches the centre
Features 159
06/10/30 17:03:17 32SJD620_163
Audio System
On models with Navigation System To adjust the balance, touch the left If you want to adjust the sound while
Adjusting the Sound or right icon on the sound grid. the radio/CD is playing, push the
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are When you touch an icon, the yellow AUDIO DISPLAY button or TUNE
each adjustable. To adjust them, bars on the grid move toward it, knob, then touch the SOUND icon in
enter the sound grid by touching the changing the balance left or right. To the display.
SOUND icon on the display or equalize the balance, touch the left
pressing the TUNE knob. or right icon until each side has a To return to the previous display,
yellow bar at the centre of the sound wait about for 5 seconds after you
Treble/Bass To adjust the bass grid. stop adjusting the sound.
and treble, touch the or
icon on each side of the Treble To adjust the fader, touch the front
or Bass adjustment bar. The or rear icon on the sound grid. When
adjustment bar next to the Treble or you touch an icon, the white bars on
Bass icon shows you the current the grid move toward it, changing
setting. the fader to the front or rear. To
equalize the fader, touch the front or
Balance/Fader These two rear icon until each side has a white
modes adjust the strength of the bar at the centre of the sound grid.
sound coming from each speaker.
Left and Right icons adjust the side- To see the audio screen when you
to-side strength, while Front and are finished adjusting the sound,
Rear icons adjust the front-to-back wait 5 seconds.
strength.
160 Features
06/10/30 17:03:26 32SJD620_164
Audio System
Playing a CD
A Type SEEK/SKIP BAR CD SLOT

RDM BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
EJECT BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR DISC BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
B Type
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RDM BUTTON CD SLOT
AM/FM BUTTON RPT BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
DISC BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
CONTINUED
Features 161
06/10/30 17:03:31 32SJD620_165
Audio System
C Type DISC ICONS
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
EJECT BUTTON LOAD BUTTON
DISC BAR SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD LOAD INDICATOR CD/AUX BUTTON
CD SLOT AM/FM BUTTON
162 Features
06/10/30 17:03:39 32SJD620_166
Audio System
On A type To Change Tracks (SKIP) REPEAT To continuously replay

With the ignition in the Each time you press and release a track, press and release the RPT
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, , the player skips forward to button. You will see RPT in the
insert a CD into the CD slot. The the beginning of the next track. display. Press it again to turn it off.
drive will pull the CD in the rest of Press and release to skip
the way and begin to play it. backward to the beginning of the RANDOM Press and release the
current track. Press it twice to skip A.SEL/RDM button to play the
You operate the CD player with the to the beginning of the previous tracks in random order. You will see
same controls used for the radio. track. RDM in the display. Press the
The number of the track playing is A.SEL/RDM button again to return
shown in the display. The system will To move rapidly within a track, press to normal play.
continuously play a CD until you and hold or .
change modes.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Features 163
06/10/30 17:03:47 32SJD620_167
Audio System
To Stop Playing a CD If you turn the system off while a CD Operating the Optional CD
Press the eject button ( ) to is playing, either with the PWR/VOL Changer
remove the CD. knob or by turning off the ignition, An optional six disc CD changer is
the CD will stay in the drive. When available for your vehicle from your
If you eject the CD, but do not you turn the system back on, the CD dealer.
remove it from the slot, the system will begin playing where it left off. This disc changer uses the same
will automatically reload the CD controls used for the in-dash CD
after 10 seconds and put it in pause player or the radio.
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button. Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
Press the AM/FM button to switch into the changer according to the
to the radio while a CD is playing. instructions that came with the unit.
Press the CD button to play the CD.
164 Features
06/10/30 17:03:51 32SJD620_168
Audio System
To select the CD changer, press the If you select an empty slot in the
CD button. The disc and track magazine, the changer will, after
numbers will be displayed. To select finding that slot empty, try to load
a different CD, use the Preset 5 the CD in the next slot.
(DISC ) or Preset 6 (DISC )
button. To select the previous disc, To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
press the Preset 5 (DISC ) button RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
or Preset 6 (DISC ) button to dash player operating instructions.
select the next disc in sequence.
Features 165
06/10/30 17:04:01 32SJD620_169
Audio System
Operating the In-Dash CD Loading CDs in the Changer 4. Repeat this until all six positions
Changer To load multiple CDs in one are loaded. The system will then
Except A type operation: begin playing the last CD loaded.
Your Hondas audio system has an
in-dash CD changer that holds up to 1. Press and hold the LOAD button If you stop loading CDs before all six
six discs, providing several hours of until you hear a beep, then you see positions are filled, the system will
continuous entertainment. You LOAD in the display. wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
operate this CD changer with the load operation and begin playing the
same controls used for the radio. 2. Insert the disc into the CD slot. last CD loaded.
Insert it only about halfway; the
To load CDs or operate the CD drive will pull it in the rest of the
changer, the ignition switch must be way. You will see BUSY in the
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) display. The CD load indicator
position. turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in 3. When LOAD appears again in
the drive or cause other problems. the display, insert the next disc
You cannot load and play 8-cm into the CD slot.
(3-inch) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
166 Features
06/10/30 17:04:09 32SJD620_170
Audio System
To load a single CD: To Play a CD You can use the SKIP bar while a
Select the CD changer by pressing disc is playing to select passages and
1. Press and release the LOAD the CD/AUX button. The system will change tracks.
button. begin playing the last selected disc in
the CD changer. You will see the To move rapidly within a track, press
2. You will see BUSY in the display. disc and track numbers displayed. and hold the left or right of the SKIP
The CD load indicator turns red bar. You will hear a beep and the
and blinks. Then, the green CD To select a different CD when all six system will continue to move
load indicator comes on. When positions are loaded, use the preset 5 through the track. Press to
you see LOAD in the display, (DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC ) move forward, or to move
insert the disc into the CD slot. button. Otherwise, press the backward. Release the bar when the
Insert it only about halfway; the corresponding number on the preset system reaches the point you want.
drive will pull it in the rest of the buttons. On models with navigation
way. system, you can also touch the Each time you press and release the
appropriate disc icon (16) or CH side of the SKIP bar, the
If you press the LOAD button while DISC button to select a different CD. system skips forward to the
a CD is playing, the system will stop beginning of the next track. Press
playing that CD and start the loading and release the side to skip
sequence. It will then play the CD backward to the beginning of the
just loaded. current track.
Features 167
06/10/30 17:04:16 32SJD620_171
Audio System
Track Scan Disc Scan Track Repeat

When you press the SCAN button or When you press and hold the SCAN When you press the RPT button or
touch the TRACK SCAN icon on the button until you see D-Scan in the touch the TRACK RPT icon on the
audio display (models with display, or when you touch the DISC audio display (models with
navigation system), the first track of SCAN icon on the audio display navigation system), the system
the current CD plays for about 10 (models with navigation system), the continuously replays the current
seconds. You will see SCAN first track of the current CD plays track. As a reminder, you will see
(TRACK SCAN) highlighted in the for about 10 seconds. You will see D- RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in the
display. To hear the rest of the track, Scan (DISC SCAN) in the display. To display. To turn this feature off,
press the SCAN button or touch hear the rest of the CD, press the touch TRACK REPEAT again.
TRACK SCAN again within 10 SCAN button or touch DISC SCAN
seconds. If you dont, the system again, within 10 seconds. If you dont, Disc Repeat
advances to the next track, plays the system advances to the next CD, When you press and hold the RPT
about 10 seconds of it, and continues plays about 10 seconds of it, and button until D-RPT is in the display,
through the rest of the tracks the continues throughout the rest of the or when you touch the DISC RPT
same way. CDs the same way. When the icon on the audio display (models
system reaches the last disc, DISC with navigation system), the system
SCAN is cancelled, and the CD plays continuously replays the current CD.
normally. As a reminder, D-RPT (DISC RPT)
is highlighted in the display. To turn
this feature off, press the SCAN
button or touch DISC RPT again.
168 Features
06/10/30 17:04:23 32SJD620_172
Audio System
Random Play Removing CDs from the Changer If you do not remove the CD from
When you press the RDM button or To remove the CD that is currently the slot, the system will reload the
touch the RANDOM icon (models playing, press the eject button. You CD after 10 seconds and put the CD
with navigation system), the system will see EJEC (EJECT) in the changer in pause mode. To begin
plays the tracks of the current CD in display. When you remove the CD playing the CD, press the CD button.
random order. You will see RDM from the slot, the system
(TRACK RANDOM) in the display. automatically begins the load To remove a different CD from the
To turn this feature off, press the sequence so you can load another changer, first select it by pressing
RDM button (touch the RANDOM CD in that position. If you do not the corresponding number on the
icon) again. load another CD, the system selects preset button (touching the
the previous mode (AM/LW, AM/ appropriate disc icon on models with
MW, FM1, or FM2). navigation system). When that CD
begins playing, press the eject button.
CONTINUED
Features 169
06/10/30 17:04:30 32SJD620_173
Audio System
If you press the eject button while Operating the Optional MD

listening to the radio, or with the Player/Changer
audio system turned off, the disc (For some types)
that was last selected is ejected. An MD player or changer is available
After that disc is ejected, pressing for your vehicle as optional
the eject button again will eject the equipment. You can operate this MD
next disc in numerical order. By player/changer with the same
doing this six times, you can remove controls used for the audio system in
all the CDs from the changer. the Navigation System. Follow the
instructions that came with the unit.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is on or off:
To eject one disc, press and release

the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the

eject button.
170 Features
06/10/30 17:04:39 32SJD620_174
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a CD is not being played, store
use only high quality CDs labelled it in its case to protect it from dust
for audio use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R or sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the CD To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
changer. Wipe across the CD from the centre
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the A new CD may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
Handle your CDs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.
Features 171
06/10/30 17:04:48 32SJD620_175
CD Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc. Message
FOCUS Error/ Press the eject button and pull out the CD.
If you see an error message in the System Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
display while playing a disc, press Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
the eject button. After ejecting the Press the eject button and pull out the CD.
disc, check it for damage or Check the CD for damage or deformation.
deformation. If there is no damage, Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
insert the disc again. message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
If there is still a problem, the error High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
message will appear again. Press the normal.
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new

disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
172 Features
06/10/30 17:04:59 32SJD620_176
CD Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc. Massage
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
If you see an error message in the FOCUS Error Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
display while playing a disc, press again. If message does not disappear or the
the eject button. After ejecting the CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
disc, check it for damage or No CD in the CD Insert CDs.
deformation. If there is no damage, magazine
insert the disc again. Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine. Check for an error message, and
If there is still a problem, the error Mechanical Error insert the magazine again. If the message does
message will appear again. Press the not disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled
eject button, and pull out the disc. out, see your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
Insert a different disc. If the new normal.
disc plays, there is a problem with No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
the first disc. If the error message CD changer
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer. B type
C type
Features 173
06/10/30 17:05:06 32SJD620_177
Setting the Clock
A Type
CLOCK BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE KNOB
H BUTTON
M BUTTON R BUTTON
B Type
CLOCK BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE KNOB

H BUTTON
M BUTTON R BUTTON
174 Features
06/10/30 17:05:14 32SJD620_178
Setting the Clock
If your vehicles battery is You can quickly set the time to the All types
disconnected or goes dead, you may nearest hour. You can switch the clock display to
need to set the clock. either the 12-hour system or 24-hour
If the displayed time is before the system. To switch the display, press
On A and B types half hour, press the CLOCK button, the PWR/VOL knob for more than 2
Press the CLOCK button. The then press the R (Preset 3) button to seconds with the audio system on,
displayed time begins to blink. set the clock back to the previous and press the TUNE knob until
Change the hours by pressing the H hour. If the displayed time is after CLK is displayed on the display.
(Preset 1) button. Change the the half hour, the clock sets forward Turn the TUNE knob left (12-hour)
minutes by pressing the M (Preset to the beginning of the next hour. or right (24-hour), and then push the
2) button. PWR/VOL knob.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
Press the CLOCK button again to 1:53 will reset to 2:00 On C type
enter the set time. The display shows the time when the
ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. The Navigation System
receives signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS), and the
displayed time is updated
automatically by the GPS. Refer to
the Navigation System Owners
Manual to set up the time.
Features 175
06/10/30 17:05:24 32SJD620_179
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls The MODE button changes the Auxiliary Input Jack
(For some types) mode. Pressing the button (For some types)
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, MW,
MODE BUTTON LW or CD (if a CD is loaded).
If you are listening to the radio, use

the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top () of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
() to go back to the previous
station.
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
If you are playing a CD, the system
Three controls for the audio system skips to the beginning of the next The auxiliary input jack is under the
are mounted in the steering wheel track each time you press the top cigarette lighter. The system will
hub. These let you control basic () of the CH button. Press the accept auxiliary input from standard
functions without removing your bottom () to return to the audio accessories.
hand from the wheel. beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous When a compatible audio unit is
The VOL button adjusts the volume track. You will see the disc and track connected to the jack, press the CD/
up () or down (). Press the top numbers in the display. AUX button to select it.
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
176 Features
06/10/30 17:05:33 32SJD620_180
Security System (For some types)
The security system helps to protect On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor

your vehicle and valuables from theft. To set the ultrasonic sensor along
The horn sounds (the beeping alarm with the security system, you should
on vehicles with ultrasonic sensor) lock the doors and the tailgate with
and the turn signal lights flash if the key or the remote transmitter.
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This When you lock the doors and the
alarm continues for 30 seconds, then tailgate with the key or the remote
the system resets. transmitter, all outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
To reset an alarming system before panel flash three times to verify the
30 seconds have elapsed, unlock the SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR doors and the tailgate are locked and
drivers door with the key or the the security system has set. When
remote transmitter. The security system sets you unlock them, these lights flash
automatically 15 seconds (25 once.
On vehicles with the ultrasonic seconds with the ultrasonic sensor
sensor, only the remote transmitter activated) after you lock the doors, Once the security system is set,
can reset the security system. bonnet, and tailgate. For the system opening any door (without using the
Unlocking the drivers door with the to activate, you must lock the doors key or the remote transmitter), the
key cannot reset the security system. and the tailgate from the outside bonnet or the tailgate will cause it to
with the key, drivers door lock tab, alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
or remote transmitter. The security removed from the dashboard or the
system indicator on the instrument wiring is cut.
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
CONTINUED
Features 177
06/10/30 17:05:42 32SJD620_181
Security System (For some types)
The alarm will also be activated if Ultrasonic Sensor

the passenger inside the locked (For some types)
vehicle turns the ignition switch on. Ultrasonic sensor is only activated If you set the security system with
when the security system is set by the windows or the sunroof open, the
On vehicles with super locking system the key or the remote transmitter. A ultrasonic sensor may activate the
When you set the super locking sensor is located near the spotlights alarm unexpectedly when the system
along with the security system, the on the front ceiling. It monitors the senses strong impacts on the vehicle
alarm is not activated if someone interior of the vehicle and activates or loud sound.
tries to open a door with the lock the alarm if someone attempts to get
tabs. into the passenger compartment You can set the security system
through a window or sunroof (if without activating the ultrasonic
The security system will not set if equipped), or moves in the sensor. Remove the ignition key,
the bonnet, tailgate, or any door is compartment. With the security push the lock tab in with the drivers
not fully closed. Before you leave the system set, only the ultrasonic door open, then close the door. The
vehicle, make sure the doors, sensor may activate. security system indicator on the
tailgate, and bonnet are securely instrument panel comes on for 3
closed. seconds, then starts blinking.
Do not attempt to alter this system Even if the ultrasonic sensor is

or add other devices to it. activated or not, the security system
can be reset by only the remote
transmitter, not the key.
178 Features
06/10/30 17:05:50 32SJD620_182
Cruise Control (For some types)
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the RES/ACCEL BUTTON wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
CRUISE CONTROL
accelerator pedal. It should be used MASTER BUTTON indicator on the instrument panel
for cruising on straight, open comes on to show the system is
motorways. It is not recommended now activated.
for city driving, winding roads,
slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad
weather.
CANCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise SET/DESEL BUTTON
control can lead to a crash.
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Use the cruise control only Button on the steering wheel. The
when travelling on open CRUISE MAIN indicator will come
motorways in good weather. on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
CONTINUED
Features 179
06/10/30 17:05:58 32SJD620_183
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your vehicle speed speed in any of these ways:
increases going down a hill, use the Press and hold the SET/DECEL
brakes to slow down. This will cancel Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when
the cruise control. To resume the set button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed.
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. desired cruising speed, release the
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator button. To slow down in very small
on the instrument panel will come amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
back on. Push on the accelerator pedal until button. Each time you do this,
you reach the desired cruising your vehicle will slow down about
When climbing a steep hill, the speed, then press the SET/ 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
automatic transmission may DECEL button.
downshift to hold the set speed. Tap the brake or clutch pedal
To increase the speed in very lightly with your foot. The
small amounts, tap the RES/ CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
ACCEL button. Each time you do the instrument panel will go out.
this, your vehicle will speed up When the vehicle slows to the
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph). desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
180 Features
06/10/30 17:06:07 32SJD620_184
Even with the cruise control turned Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
on, you can still use the accelerator When you push the CANCEL button,
pedal to speed up for passing. After or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
completing the pass, take your foot system will remember the
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle previously-set cruising speed. To
will return to the set cruising speed. return to that speed, accelerate to
above 40 km/h (25 mph), then press
Resting your foot on the brake or and release the RES/ACCEL button.
clutch pedal causes the cruise The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
control to cancel. comes on, and the vehicle will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Button turns the system completely
You can cancel cruise control in any off and the CRUISE MAIN indicator
of these ways: goes off, then the previous cruising
speed is erased.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the cruise control master

button.
Features 181
06/10/30 17:06:09 32SJD620_185
182
06/10/30 17:06:13 32SJD620_186
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 184

vehicle, you should know what fuel Fuel Recommendation .................. 184
to use and how to check the levels of Service Station Procedures .......... 185
important fluids. You also need to Refueling..................................... 185
know how to properly store luggage Opening and Closing the
or packages. The information in this Bonnet ..................................... 186
section will help you. If you plan to Oil Check .................................... 188
add any accessories to your vehicle, Engine Coolant Check .............. 189
please read the information in this Fuel Cutoff System........................ 191
section first. Fuel Economy ................................ 192
Accessories and Modifications .... 193
Carrying Luggage .......................... 195
Before Driving 183

06/10/30 17:06:25 32SJD620_187
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Diesel models

Help assure your vehicles future Petrol models Your vehicle is designed to use only
reliability and performance by paying Except for New Zealand models Diesel Fuel (also known as
extra attention to how you drive Your vehicle is designed to operate Automotive gas oil and Derv).
during the first 1,000 km (625 miles). on Premium/Super unleaded petrol
with a Research Octane Number Your vehicle is not designed to use
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid (RON) of 95 or higher. RME (Rapeseed Methyl Ester). For
acceleration. more information, ask your dealer.
New Zealand models
Avoid hard braking for the first Your vehicle is designed to operate The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can
300 km (200 miles). on unleaded petrol with 91 Research vary in different countries, and only
Octane Number (RON) or higher. clean and good quality fuel should be
Do not change the oil until the used.
scheduled maintenance time. All models
Petrol of the recommended
Do not tow a trailer. Research Octane Number (RON)
may not be available in some areas.
You should also follow these In this case, petrol of a lower octane
recommendations with an may be used if it does not cause
overhauled or exchanged engine, or engine knocking.
when the brakes are replaced.
Using petrol containing lead will
damage your vehicles emissions con-
trols and engine. This contributes to
air pollution.
184 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:06:35 32SJD620_188
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
You need to use the proper fuel for Refueling

EN590 and also vary the fuel
depending on the season. Fuel is highly flammable and
explosive. You can be burned
Select the proper fuel according to or seriously injured when
the regional or climate condition. Pull handling fuel.
Use of inadequate fuel may reduce
engine power. In this case, the glow Stop the engine, and keep
plugs indicator blinks. heat, sparks, and flame
away.
For proper fuel selection, DIESEL Handle fuel only outdoors.
is marked on the fuel fill cap. Wipe up spills immediately.
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
1. Park with the left side closest to ATTACHMENT

Serious damage may occur if petrol the service station pump.
is used in diesel engines.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle at the outside of the
drivers seat.
FUEL FILL CAP TETHER
CONTINUED
Before Driving 185

06/10/30 17:06:44 32SJD620_189
Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. Opening and Closing the Bonnet
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes. BONNET RELEASE HANDLE
The fuel fill cap is attached to the

fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Pull
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to top off the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand LATCH
with temperature changes.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on parking brake. Pull the bonnet edge of the bonnet near the centre.
until it clicks at least once. release handle under the lower Slide your hand to the left until
corner of the dashboard. The you feel the bonnet latch handle.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until bonnet will pop up slightly. Push this handle up to release it.
it latches. Lift up the bonnet.
186 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:06:50 32SJD620_190
If the bonnet latch handle moves To close the bonnet, lift it up slightly
stiffly, or if you can open the bonnet to remove the support rod from the
without lifting the handle, the SUPPORT ROD GRIP hole. Put the support rod back into
mechanism should be cleaned and its holding clip. Lower the bonnet to
lubricated. about 30 cm (a foot) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support

rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
bonnet.
Before Driving 187

06/10/30 17:06:59 32SJD620_191
Oil Check Petrol models Diesel models

All engines consume oil as part of DIPSTICK
their normal operation, therefore,
the engine oil level must be checked
regularly, for example when
refuelling. Always check the oil
before a long journey.
The amount of oil consumed

depends on how the vehicle is driven
and the climatic and road conditions
encountered. The rate of oil DIPSTICK
consumption can be up to 1 Litre per
1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption is 1. Remove the dipstick (orange 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
likely to be higher when the engine handle). cloth or paper towel.
is new.
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
Make sure the engine is warmed up
and parked on level ground. Turn off
the engine and wait approximately 3
minutes before checking the oil level.
188 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:07:08 32SJD620_192
Petrol models Diesel models Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK MAX
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK MIN
4. Remove the dipstick again, and If it is near or below the lower mark,
check the level. It should be see Adding Engine Oil on page On petrol models
between the upper and lower 239 on petrol models, 241 on diesel Look at the coolant level in the
marks. models. radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 243 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 189

06/10/30 17:07:13 32SJD620_193
Refer to Owners Maintenance

Checks on page 230 for information
EXPANSION TANK MAX about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MIN
On diesel models
The coolant level in the expansion
tank should be checked only when
the engine and the cooling system
are cold. Make sure it is between the
MAX and MIN lines. If it is below
the MIN line, see Adding Engine
Coolant on page 246 .
190 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:07:20 32SJD620_194
Fuel Cutoff System (For some types)
After the switch has activated, it

must be reset by pressing the button
FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH before the engine can be restarted.
Push
Push Leaking fuel can ignite or
explode, causing you to be
seriously or fatally injured.
Always check for fuel leaks

before resetting the switch.
TAB
There is a fuel cutoff switch behind In a collision or sudden impact, this

the glove box on the centre console switch automatically cuts off the fuel
side. supply to the engine.
To locate the switch, open the glove

box and disengage the two tabs by
pushing on each side panel, then
pivot the glove box out of the way.
Extend your arm through the
opened glove box.
Before Driving 191

06/10/30 17:07:28 32SJD620_195
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Drive moderately. Rapid

Always maintain your vehicle acceleration, abrupt cornering,
according to the maintenance and hard braking use more fuel.
schedule. See Owners
Maintenance Checks (see page Always drive in the highest gear
230 ). possible.
For example, an underinflated tyre Try to maintain a constant speed.

causes more rolling resistance, Every time you slow down and
which uses more fuel. speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use the cruise control (on
The build-up of snow or mud on some types) when appropriate.
your vehicles underside adds
weight and rolling resistance. Combine several short trips into
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel one.
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion. The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.
192 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:07:34 32SJD620_196
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Accessories

some non-Honda accessories, can Your dealer has genuine Honda
make your vehicle unsafe. Before accessories that allow you to Improper accessories or
you make any modifications or add personalize your vehicle. These modifications can affect your
any accessories, be sure to read the accessories have been designed and vehicles handling, stability,
following information. approved for your vehicle. and performance, and cause
a crash in which you can be
Although non-Honda accessories hurt or killed.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and Follow all instructions in this
could adversely affect your vehicles owners manual regarding
handling and stability. accessories and
modifications.
When properly installed, cellular

phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicles
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 193

06/10/30 17:07:44 32SJD620_197
Accessories and Modifications
Before installing any accessory: Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tyres
Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
Make sure the accessory does not or replacing components with your vehicles anti-lock brakes and
obscure any lights, or interfere non-Honda components could other systems.
with proper vehicle operation or seriously affect your vehicles
performance. handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicles
Be sure electronic accessories do Here are some examples: safety features can make the
not overload electrical circuits Lowering your vehicle with a systems ineffective.
(see page 318 ) or interfere with non-Honda suspension kit that
proper operation of your vehicle. significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
Before installing any electronic undercarriage to hit speed bumps
accessory, have the installer or other raised objects, which
contact your dealer for assistance. could cause the airbags to deploy.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation. Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
Do not install accessories on the affect the handling and stability.
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas, Non-Honda wheels, because they
accessories may interfere with are a universal design, can cause
proper operation of the side excessive stress on suspension
curtain airbags. components.
194 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:07:54 32SJD620_198
Carrying Luggage
DOOR POCKETS DRIVERS POCKET CENTRE POCKET Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Seat-back pockets
Luggage area, including the rear
seats when folded down
Door pockets
Seat under box
Cushion tray
Drivers pocket
Centre pocket (on some types)
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much luggage,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicles handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tyres, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of luggage, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKET SEAT UNDER BOX GLOVE BOX
(DRIVERS SIDE)
LUGGAGE AREA SEAT-BACK POCKET CUSHION TRAY
(PASSENGERS SIDE)
: For some types
Before Driving 195

06/10/30 17:08:02 32SJD620_199
Carrying Luggage
Load Limits Carrying Items in the Passenger

When you load luggage, the total Compartment
weight of the vehicle, all passengers, Overloading or improper Store or secure all items that could
luggage and towbar must not exceed loading can affect handling be thrown around and hurt
the maximum permissible weight. and stability and cause a someone during a crash.
The load for the front and rear axles crash in which you can be
also must not exceed the maximum hurt or killed. Do not put any items on top of the
permissible axle weight. tonneau cover (for some types).
Refer to page 331 for the maximum Follow all load limits and They can block your view and be
permissible weight and maximum other loading guidelines in thrown around the vehicle during
permissible axle weight. this manual. a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor

behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the drivers ability to operate the
pedals, and proper operation of the
seats. Do not stack items higher
than the back of the front seats.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the front seats.
Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
196 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:08:12 32SJD620_200
Carrying Luggage
Carrying Luggage in the Luggage Refer to page 115 for folding rear Concerning lashing means and
Area or on a Roof Rack seat-back. retaining devices offered on the
Do not place any heavy articles on accessory market, please contact
the back of the rear centre seat. It If you carry large items that your dealer.
can hinder the rear centre seat prevent you from closing the
from moving. tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
Distribute luggage evenly on the possibility of carbon monoxide A normal bike rack must not be
floor of the luggage area, placing poisoning, follow the instructions fitted to the tailgate.
the heaviest items on the bottom on page 65 .
and as far forward as possible.
Try to secure the items with rope If you can carry any items on a
or cord so they will not shift while roof rack, be sure the total weight
you are driving. of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
If you fold down the back seat, tie weight. Please contact your dealer
down items that could be thrown for further information.
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. If you use an accessory roof rack,
Try to secure the items with rope the roof rack weight limit may be
or cord so they will not shift while lower. Refer to the information that
you are driving. Do not stack came with your roof rack.
items higher than the back of the
front seats.
Before Driving 197

06/10/30 17:08:16 32SJD620_201
Carrying Luggage
Luggage Hooks
HOOKS
The hooks on the floor of the

luggage area enable you to tie down
items stored in the back. Make sure
all stored items are secured before
driving.
198 Before Driving

06/10/30 17:08:20 32SJD620_202
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 200

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 201
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine
manual transmission. It also includes Petrol models ............................. 202
important information on parking Diesel models ............................. 203
your vehicle, the braking system, Manual Transmission.................... 204
and facts you need if you are Automatic Transmission............... 207
planning to tow a trailer. Parking Tips ................................... 213
Braking System.............................. 214
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 215
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 217
Driving in Bad Weather ................ 219
Towing a Trailer ............................ 221
Driving 199
06/10/30 17:08:25 32SJD620_203
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle is designed to give you

optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance.
Use caution if you should drive

your vehicle on very rough or
rutted roads. You could damage
the suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot speed bumps can
also cause damage.
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
200 Driving
06/10/30 17:08:36 32SJD620_204
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 108 ).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 126 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 95 ).
2. Check that the bonnet is fully
closed. 8. Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed.
3. Visually check the tyres. If a tyre
looks low, use a gauge to check its 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
pressure. your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 17 ).
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or 10.When you start the engine, check
fastened down securely. the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 72 ).
Driving 201
06/10/30 17:08:46 32SJD620_205
Starting the Engine (Petrol models)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects The engine is harder to start in cold
electrical accessories to reduce your vehicle from theft. If an weather. Also, the thinner air found
the drain on the battery. improperly-coded key (or other at altitudes above 2,400 meters
device) is used, the engines fuel (8,000 feet) adds to this problem.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission system is disabled. See Immobilizer
Push the clutch pedal down all the System on page 97 . If the outside temperature is below
way and shift the transmission to freezing, or if your vehicle has not
neutral. 5. If the engine does not start within been driven for several days, warm
15 seconds, or starts but stalls up the engine for a few minutes
On vehicles with automatic right away, repeat step 4 with the before driving (prohibited in
transmission accelerator pedal pressed halfway Germany! 30 StVO).
Make sure the shift lever is in down. If the engine starts, release
Park. Press on the brake pedal. pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 6. If the engine fails to start, press
START (III) position. Do not hold the accelerator pedal all the way
the key in the START (III) down, and hold it there while
position for more than 15 seconds starting to clear flooding. If the
at a time. If the engine does not engine still does not start, return
start right away, pause for at least to step 5.
10 seconds before trying again.
202 Driving
06/10/30 17:08:57 32SJD620_206
Starting the Engine (Diesel models)
1. Apply the parking brake. Warming Up

In the interests of fuel economy, it is
2. Turn off all electrical accessories The immobilizer system protects advisable to start driving straight
to reduce the drain on the battery. your vehicle from theft. If an away, remembering that harsh
improperly-coded key (or other acceleration or labouring the engine
3. Push the clutch pedal down all the device) is used, the engines fuel before the normal operating
way and shift the transmission to system is disabled. See Immobilizer temperature has been reached can
neutral. System on page 97 . damage the engine.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON Cold Climates

(II) position. Wait until the glow In very cold climates the battery
plugs indicator turns off. charging and oil pressure indicators The engine must not be run above
may take several seconds to fast idle speed until the oil pressure
5. Without touching the accelerator extinguish. Similarly, engine warning indicator goes off. This will
pedal, turn the ignition key to the cranking times will also increase. ensure that the engine and
START (III) position, and release turbocharger bearings are properly
the key as soon as the engine is If you start the engine in cold lubricated before being run at
running. If the engine does not weather or at high altitude, the glow normal driving speeds.
start right away, do not hold the plugs indicator may also remain on
key in START (III) for more than longer than normal operation. Ignition Switching Off
15 seconds at a time (20 seconds To avoid the possibility of damaging
in cold weather). Pause for at least the turbocharger bearings through
20 seconds before trying again. inadequate lubrication, ALWAYS
allow the engine to idle for 10
seconds before turning off the
engine.
Driving 203
06/10/30 17:09:04 32SJD620_207
Manual Transmission
When shifting up or down, make When slowing down, you can get
sure you push the clutch pedal down extra braking from the engine by
all the way, shift to the next gear, shifting to a lower gear. This extra
and let the pedal up gradually. When braking can help you maintain a safe
you are not shifting, do not rest your speed and prevent your brakes from
foot on the clutch pedal. This can overheating while going down a
cause excessive clutch wear. steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
Come to a full stop before you shift go into the tachometers red zone in
into reverse. You can damage the the lower gear. Refer to the
transmission by trying to shift into maximum allowable speeds charts.
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
On some models pause for a few seconds before
The manual transmission is shifting into reverse, or shift into one Rapid slowing or speeding-
synchronized in all forward gears for of the forward gears for a moment. up can cause loss of control
smooth operation. It has a lockout so This stops the gears so they wont on slippery surfaces. If you
you cannot accidentally shift from grind. crash, you can be injured.
any forward gear to reverse while
the vehicle is moving at a certain Use extra care when driving
speed (see page 206 ). on slippery surfaces.
204 Driving
06/10/30 17:09:12 32SJD620_208
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Petrol models Maximum Allowable Speeds

Drive in the highest gear that lets The speeds in this table are the
the engine run and accelerate Shift up Normal acceleration maximum allowable speeds in each
smoothly. This will give you good gear. If you exceed these speeds, the
fuel economy and effective 1st to 2nd 15 km/h (9 mph) engine speed will enter into the
emissions control. The following 2nd to 3rd 35 km/h (22 mph) tachometers red zone. If this occurs,
shift points are recommended: 3rd to 4th 50 km/h (31 mph) you may feel the engine cut in and
4th to 5th 70 km/h (44 mph) out. This is caused by a limiter in the
5th to 6th 100 km/h (62 mph) engines computer controls. The
engine will run normally when you
reduce the rpm below the red zone.
Diesel models
Before downshifting, make sure the
Shift up Normal acceleration vehicle will not exceed the maximum
allowable speed specified by the
1st to 2nd 20 km/h (12 mph) chart for the lower gear to avoid
2nd to 3rd 40 km/h (25 mph) engine damage.
3rd to 4th 55 km/h (34 mph)
4th to 5th 70 km/h (44 mph)
5th to 6th 85 km/h (53 mph)
CONTINUED
Driving 205
06/10/30 17:09:23 32SJD620_209
Manual Transmission
Petrol models Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to

reverse, apply the parking brake,
Gear Maximum and turn the ignition switch to the
allowable speeds ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
1st 50 km/h (31 mph)
2nd 93 km/h (58 mph) 3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
3rd 135 km/h (84 mph) reverse.
4th 169 km/h (105 mph)
5th 210 km/h (130 mph) 4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
Diesel models
If you need to use this procedure to
Gear Maximum shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
allowable speeds The manual transmission has developing a problem. Have it
lockout so you cannot accidentally checked by your dealer.
1st 37 km/h (23 mph) shift from any forward gear to
2nd 71 km/h (44 mph) reverse while the vehicle is moving
3rd 116 km/h (72 mph) at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
4th 157 km/h (98 mph) to reverse when the vehicle is
5th 187 km/h (116 mph) stopped, do the following.
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,

: The speeds in the table are move the shift lever to the first/
calculated in relation to the second gear side of the neutral
engine speeds for each gear. gate, then shift to reverse.
206 Driving
06/10/30 17:09:31 32SJD620_210
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The D indicator comes on for a Shifting

few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) RELEASE
BUTTON
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the D
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by SHIFT LEVER
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from any position, press
panel show which position the shift firmly on the brake pedal and press
lever is in. the release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
CONTINUED
Driving 207
06/10/30 17:09:39 32SJD620_211
To shift from: Do this: If you have done all of the above and Neutral (N) Use neutral if you
Press the brake pedal and still cannot move the lever out of need to restart a stalled engine, or if
P to R press the shift lever release Park, see Shift Lock Release on it is necessary to stop briefly with
button. page 211 or 212 . the engine idling. Shift to the Park
R to P position if you need to leave your
N to R Press the shift lever release To avoid transmission damage, come vehicle for any reason. Press on the
D to 2 button. to a complete stop before shifting brake pedal when you are moving
2 to 1 into Park. You must also press the the shift lever from neutral to
1 to 2 release button to shift into Park. The another gear.
2 to D shift lever must be in Park before
D to N Move the shift lever. you can remove the key from the Drive (D) Use this position for
N to D ignition switch. your normal driving. The
R to N transmission automatically selects a
D3 to D Press the D3 button. Reverse (R) Press the brake suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
D to D3 pedal and press the release button speed and acceleration. You may
on the side of the shift lever to shift notice the transmission shifting up at
Park (P) This position mechani- from Park to reverse. To shift from higher engine speeds when the
cally locks the transmission. Use reverse to neutral, come to a engine is cold. This helps the engine
Park whenever you are turning off or complete stop and then shift. Press warm up faster.
starting the engine. To shift out of the release button before shifting
Park, you must press on the brake into reverse from neutral.
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
208 Driving
06/10/30 17:09:47 32SJD620_212
D3 Mode Shifting out from the D position will

cancel the D3 mode, and the D3
indicator will go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume the D3
mode and the indicator comes on.
Turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK (0) position turns this mode
off. When you restart the engine,
select the D position and press the
D3 mode switch again to use this
mode.
D3 SWITCH D3 MODE INDICATOR
The D3 mode indicator also comes
Press the D3 switch on the side of When the D3 mode is on, the on for a few seconds when you turn
the shift lever to turn this mode on transmission selects only the first the ignition switch to the ON (II)
or off; the D3 mode indicator comes three gears. Use D3 mode when position.
on whenever the D3 mode is towing a trailer, or to provide engine
selected. braking when going down a steep hill. Second (2) To shift to second,
D3 mode can also keep the press the release button on the side
D3 mode can be turned on or off transmission from cycling between of the shift lever. This position locks
only when the ignition switch is in third and fourth gears in stop-and-go the transmission in second gear. It
the ON (II) position and the shift driving. does not downshift to first gear
lever is in the D position. when you come to a stop.
CONTINUED
Driving 209
06/10/30 17:09:57 32SJD620_213
Use second gear: If you shift into first position when

For more power when climbing. the vehicle speed is above 50 km/h Position Maximum
(31 mph), the transmission shifts allowable speeds
To increase engine braking when into second gear first to avoid
going down steep hills. sudden engine braking. D3 156 km/h (97 mph)
For starting out on a slippery Maximum Allowable Speeds 2 107 km/h (66 mph)
surface or in deep snow. The speeds in this table are the
maximum allowable speeds in each 1 61 km/h (38 mph)
To help reduce wheel spin. position. If you exceed these speeds,
the engine speed will enter into the
When driving downhill with a tachometers red zone. If this occurs,
trailer. you will feel the engine cut in and
out. This is caused by a limiter in the
First (1) To shift from second to engines computer controls. The
first, press the release button on the engine will run normally when you
side of the shift lever. This position reduce the rpm below the red zone.
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting Before downshifting, make sure the
through 1, 2, and D, you can operate vehicle will not exceed the maximum
this transmission much like a manual allowable speed specified by the
transmission without a clutch pedal. chart for the lower gear to avoid
engine damage.
210 Driving
06/10/30 17:10:07 32SJD620_214
Shift Lock Release RELEASE BUTTON

For left-hand drive type
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.

NOTCH
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch. COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
shift lock release slot cover. Using release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or cover. Make sure the notch on the
metal fingernail file, carefully pry 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the drivers side. Press
on the notch of the cover to press the release button on the the brake pedal, and restart the
remove it. side of the shift lever and move it engine.
out of Park to neutral.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
Driving 211
06/10/30 17:10:17 32SJD620_215
Shift Lock Release RELEASE BUTTON

For right-hand drive type COVER
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch. NOTCH SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
shift lock release slot cover. Using release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or cover. Make sure the notch on the
metal fingernail file, carefully pry 5. Push down on the key while you cover is rearward. Press the brake
on the notch of the cover to press the release button on the pedal, and restart the engine.
remove it. side of the shift lever and move it
out of Park to neutral. If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
212 Driving
06/10/30 17:10:27 32SJD620_216
Parking Tips
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the sunroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or equipped) and the windows are curb. If your vehicle has a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
On vehicles with automatic transmission turn the front wheels toward the
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If your vehicle has a manual
the transmission in Park. This keeps in the luggage area or take them transmission, put it in reverse gear.
the vehicle from moving and putting with you.
pressure on the parking mechanism Make sure the parking brake is
in the transmission. Lock the doors with the key or the fully released before driving away.
remote transmitter. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
On vehicles with security system damage the rear brakes.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Driving 213
06/10/30 17:10:36 32SJD620_217
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check your brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power through deep water. Apply the All four brakes have audible brake
assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes moderately to see if they feel wear indicators.
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock normal. If not, apply them gently and
brake system (ABS) helps you retain frequently until they do. Be extra If the brake pads need replacing, you
steering control when braking very cautious and alert in your driving. will hear a distinctive, metallic
hard. screeching sound when you apply
Braking System Design the brake pedal. If you do not have
Resting your foot on the brake pedal The hydraulic system that operates the brake pads replaced, they will
applied the brakes slightly. This the brakes has two separate circuits. screech all the time. It is normal for
builds up heat, and reduces brake Each circuit works diagonally across the brakes to occasionally squeal or
effectiveness and brake pad life. In the vehicle (the left-front brake is squeak when you apply them.
addition, fuel economy can be connected with the right-rear brake,
reduced. It also keeps your brake etc.). If one circuit should develop a
lights on all the time, confusing problem, you will still have braking
drivers behind you. at two wheels.
Constant application of the brakes

when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their
effectiveness. Use the engine to
assist the brakes by taking your foot
off the accelerator and downshifting
to a lower gear.
214 Driving
06/10/30 17:10:43 32SJD620_218
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from You will feel a pulsation in the brake
locking up, and helps you retain pedal when the ABS activates, and If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the you may hear some noise. This is lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a normal: it is the ABS rapidly has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. pumping the brakes. On dry like a conventional system, but
pavement, you will need to press on without anti-lock. You should have
The electronic brake distribution the brake pedal very hard before the your dealer inspect your vehicle as
(EBD) system, which is part of the ABS activates. However, you may soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear feel the ABS activate immediately if
braking distribution according to you are trying to stop on snow or ice. If the ABS indicator and the brake
vehicle loading. system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
You should never pump the brake pedal. released, the EBD system may also
Let the ABS work for you by always be shut down.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as stomp and steer.
CONTINUED
Driving 215
06/10/30 17:10:50 32SJD620_219
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Test your brakes as instructed on Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
page 317 . If the brakes feel normal, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
drive slowly and have your vehicle distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
repaired by your dealer as soon as vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking steering control during braking. lock.
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of ABS will not prevent a skid that
control. results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
The VSA indicator will come on corner too fast or making a sudden
along with the ABS indicator. lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent the loss of

stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
216 Driving
06/10/30 17:10:59 32SJD620_220
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or VSA System Indicator soon as possible.
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engines output, The VSA system indicator (see page Without VSA, your vehicle will have
and by selectively applying the 78 ) comes on and stays on when normal braking and cornering ability,
brakes. there is a problem with the VSA but it will not have VSA traction and
system. The VSA activation indicator stability enhancement.
When VSA activates, you may notice will also come on.
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it If this indicator comes on while
does at other times. You will also see driving, pull to the side of the road
the VSA activation indicator blink. when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
The VSA system cannot enhance the restarting the engine. If the VSA
vehicles driving stability in all system indicator stays on, or comes
situations and does not control your back on while driving, have the VSA
vehicles entire braking system. It is system inspected by your dealer.
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
Driving 217
06/10/30 17:11:09 32SJD620_221
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tyre Sizes

In certain unusual conditions when Driving with varying tyre or wheel
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow sizes may cause the VSA to
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier malfunction. When replacing tyres,
to free it with the VSA temporarily make sure they are of the same size
switched off. When the VSA system and type as your original tyres (see
is off, the traction control system is page 278 ).
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if If you install winter tyres, make sure
you are not able to free it when the they are the same size as those that
VSA is on. were originally supplied with your
VSA OFF SWITCH vehicle. Exercise the same caution
Immediately after freeing your during winter driving as you would if
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on This switch is under the power your vehicle was not equipped with
again. We do not recommend driving window switch. To turn the VSA VSA.
your vehicle with the VSA and system on and off, press and hold it
traction control systems switched off. until you hear a beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation

indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
218 Driving
06/10/30 17:11:16 32SJD620_222
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving Technique Always drive Visibility Being able to see

slower than you would in dry clearly in all directions and being
weather. It takes your vehicle longer visible to other drivers are important
to react, even in conditions that may in all weather conditions. This is
seem just barely damp. Apply more difficult in bad weather. To be
smooth, even pressure to all the seen more clearly during daylight
controls. Abrupt steering wheel hours, turn on your headlights.
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of Inspect your windscreen wipers and
control in wet weather. Be extra washers frequently. Keep the wind-
cautious for the first few kilometers screen washer reservoir full of the
(miles) of driving while you adjust to proper fluid. Have the windscreen
the change in driving conditions. wiper blades replaced if they start to
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re- This is especially true in snow. A streak the windscreen or leave parts
quire a different driving technique person can forget some snow-driving unwiped. Use the demister and air
because of reduced traction and techniques during the summer conditioning to keep the windows
visibility. Keep your vehicle well- months. Practice is needed to relearn from fogging up on the inside (see
maintained and exercise greater those skills. pages 94 and 145 ).
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control (on Exercise extra caution when driving
some types) should not be used in in rain after a long dry spell. After
these conditions. months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
CONTINUED
Driving 219
06/10/30 17:11:23 32SJD620_223
Driving in Bad Weather
Traction Check your tyres CAUTION: Do not drive on the road

frequently for wear and proper where water is deep. Driving through
pressure. Both are important in deep water will cause damage to the
preventing aquaplaning (loss of engine and electrical equipment and
traction on a wet surface). In the the vehicle will break down.
winter, mount snow tyres on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,

they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. Clear roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or
outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The
The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces
covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting
mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control.
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If

traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
a skid.
220 Driving
06/10/30 17:11:30 32SJD620_224
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed Load Limits

primarily to carry passengers and
their luggage. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your
vehicle and trailer can cause
a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed. The total weight of the trailer and The trailer nose load should
towbar (with/without brakes) plus never exceed 90 kg (198 lbs). This
Check the loading of your its luggage must not exceed the is the amount of weight the trailer
vehicle and trailer carefully maximum towing weight. See page puts on the towbar when it is fully-
before starting to drive. 331 . loaded. As a rule of thumb for
trailer weight of less than 500 kg
(1,102 lbs), the trailer nose load
should be 10 percent of the total
trailer package.
CONTINUED
Driving 221
06/10/30 17:11:40 32SJD620_225
Towing a Trailer
For example, if the trailer and its Please consider that the Towing a load that is too heavy can
load weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), the installation of optionals (and trailer seriously affect your vehicles
trailer nose load should be 22.5 kg nose load when towing a trailer) handling and performance. It can
(50 lbs). Adjust trailers luggage to will reduce the loading capacity. also damage the engine and
change the trailer nose load. Start by drivetrain.
putting approximately 60 percent of The maximum towing weight
the luggage toward the front and must not exceed the specified limit Checking Loads
40 percent toward the rear. With a as shown on page 331 . The best way to confirm that vehicle
trailer package of more than 500 kg and trailer weights are within limits
(1,102 lbs), you may need to adjust This weight will be estimated on is to have them checked at a public
the luggage weight toward the rear. normal driving below 1,000 meters scale.
Never load the trailer so the back is elevation.
heavier than the front. This takes Using a suitable scale or a special
weight off your vehicles rear axle If you tow a trailer in mountainous trailer nose load gauge, check the
and reduces traction. conditions, remember to reduce 10% total weight, the weight at each axle
of the combined vehicle and trailer and the trailer nose load the first
The maximum permissible weight weights from the maximum towing time you set up a towing combination
must not exceed the specified limit weight for every 1,000 meters of (a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer),
as shown on page 331 . elevation. then recheck the loads whenever the
conditions change.
The maximum permissible weight The combined vehicle and trailer
is total weight of the vehicle, weights are the maximum
driver, passengers, luggage and permissible weight and trailer weight
towbar. with everything in and on the trailer.
222 Driving
06/10/30 17:11:51 32SJD620_226
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Towbars Trailer Lights

Accessories Any towbar used on your vehicle Trailer lights and equipment must
Towing can require a variety of must be properly bolted to the comply with the countrys
equipment, depending on the size of underbody. regulations where you are driving.
your trailer, how it will be used, how Check the requirements for the
much load you are towing, and Refer to page 330 for the towbar areas where you plan to tow, and use
where you tow. mounting points. only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Discuss any additional needs with Trailer Brakes
your trailer sales or rental agency, If you are thinking of getting a trailer Your vehicle has a connector to
and make sure all equipment is that has brakes, be sure they are install an optional trailer lighting
properly installed, maintained, and electronically actuated. Do not connector. It is located in the
also meets the countrys regulations attempt to tap into your vehicles luggage area by the right tail-lights.
where you are driving. hydraulic system. No matter how You can get an optional trailer
successful it may seem, any attempt lighting connector for your vehicle
Safety Chains to attach trailer brakes to your from your dealer.
Always use safety chains when you vehicles hydraulic system will lower
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains braking effectiveness and create a Since lighting and wiring vary by
are secured to the trailer and towbar, potential hazard. trailer type and brand, you should
and that they cross under the trailer have a qualified technician install a
nose and can catch the trailer if it See your trailer dealer or rental suitable connector between the
becomes unhitched. Leave enough agency for more information on vehicle and the trailer. Improper
slack to allow the trailer to turn installing electric brakes. equipment or installation can cause
corners easily, but do not let the damage to your vehicles electrical
chains drag on the ground. system.
CONTINUED
Driving 223
06/10/30 17:12:03 32SJD620_227
Towing a Trailer
Always consult your dealer before Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
connecting the trailer lights to your When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
vehicles lighting system. driving away, be sure to check the properly.
following:
Additional Towing Equipment Your vehicle tyres and spare are
There may be laws requiring special The vehicle has been properly properly inflated, and the trailer
outside mirrors when towing a trailer. serviced, and the suspension, tyres and spare are inflated as
Check the local laws in the country. cooling system, and lights are in recommended by the trailer
Even if there are no legal good operating condition. maker.
requirements, you should install
special mirrors if you cannot clearly The trailer has been properly Be sure to check regulations
see behind you, or if the trailer serviced and is in good condition. concerning the maximum speed or
creates a blind spot. driving restrictions for vehicles
All weights and loads are within towing trailers. If you are driving
Ask your trailer sales or rental limits. across several countries, check
agency if any other items are each countrys requirements
recommended or required for your The towbar, safety chains, and any before leaving home, because
towing situation. other attachments are secure. regulations may vary.
All items in or on the trailer are Operating speed when towing a

properly secured and cannot shift trailer is restricted to 100 km/h
while you drive. (62 mph).
224 Driving
06/10/30 17:12:11 32SJD620_228
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
The added weight, length, and Drive slower than normal in all Crosswinds and air turbulence
height of a trailer will affect your driving situations, and obey posted caused by passing trucks can disrupt
vehicles handling and performance, speed limits for vehicles with trailers. your steering and cause the trailer to
so driving with a trailer requires sway. When being passed by a large
some special driving skills and If your vehicle has an automatic vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
techniques. transmission, use the D position steer straight ahead. Do not try to
when towing a trailer on level roads. make quick steering or braking
For your safety and the safety of D3 is the proper shift lever position corrections.
others, take time to practice driving to use when towing a trailer in hilly
manoeuvre before heading for the terrain. Backing Up
open road, and follow the guidelines Always drive slowly and have
below. Do not exceed the limited speed someone guide you when backing up.
when towing a trailer. At higher Grip the bottom of the steering
speeds, the trailer may sway or wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
affect vehicle handling (see Driving to get the trailer to move to the left,
on Hills in the next page for and turn the wheel right to move the
additional gear information). trailer to the right.
CONTINUED
Driving 225
06/10/30 17:12:23 32SJD620_229
Towing a Trailer
Parking Making Turns and Braking On vehicles with automatic transmission

Follow all normal precautions when Make turns more slowly and wider When driving down hills, reduce
parking, including firmly setting the than normal. The trailer tracks a your speed and use the D3 position.
parking brake and putting the smaller arc than your vehicle, and it Do not ride the brakes, and
transmission in Park (automatic) or can hit or run over something the remember it will take longer to slow
in first or reverse (manual). Also, vehicle misses. Allow more time and down and stop when towing a trailer.
place wheel chocks at each of the distance for braking. Do not brake or
trailers tyres. turn suddenly as this could cause the If you must stop when facing uphill,
trailer to jackknife or turn over. use the foot brake or parking brake.
On diesel models only Do not try to hold the vehicle in
You should keep the engine idling Driving on Hills place by pressing on the accelerator,
for about 2 minutes before turning When climbing hills, closely watch as this can cause the automatic
off the ignition switch. (Idling the your temperature gauge. If it nears transmission to overheat.
engine is prohibited in some the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
countries. Always follow the legal conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Driving on an uphill road of more
requirements of the countries in necessary, pull to the side of the than 12% slope is not recommended
which you will drive.) road to let the engine cool. for your vehicle.
On vehicles with manual transmission We recommend that you tow a

When driving down hills, reduce trailer on the roads recommended by
your speed, and shift down to second the trailer association.
gear. Do not ride the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
226 Driving
06/10/30 17:12:27 32SJD620_230
Maintenance
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is Maintenance Safety ....................... 228

the best way to protect your invest- Maintenance Schedule .................. 229
ment. You will be rewarded with Petrol models ............................. 231
safer, more economical, trouble-free Diesel models ............................. 234
driving. This section lists items that Maintenance Record ..................... 236
need to be checked regularly and Fluid Locations............................... 237
explains how to check them. It also Adding Engine Oil
details some simple maintenance Petrol models ............................. 239
tasks you can do yourself. The Diesel models ............................. 241
maintenance schedules show you Engine Coolant
when these things need to be done. Petrol models ............................. 243
Diesel models ............................. 246
Windscreen Washers .................... 248
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 249
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 249
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 250
Power Steering Fluid..................... 252
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 253
Fuel Filter ....................................... 255
Lights .............................................. 256
Air Conditioning System ............... 270
Wiper Blades .................................. 271
Tyres ............................................... 274
Checking the Battery .................... 281
Vehicle Storage .............................. 283
Priming the Fuel System .......... 284
Maintenance 227
06/10/30 17:12:37 32SJD620_231
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
technician. vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you
To eliminate potential hazards, read can be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection and precautions can cause
and skills required. and maintenance you to be seriously hurt or
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and killed.
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owners
is set, and the engine is off. manual/Service Book. Always follow the
procedures and precautions
To clean parts, use a commercially in this owners manual.
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not fuel. Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is Some of the most important safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you precautions are given here. However,
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. we cannot warn you of every
and flames away from the battery conceivable hazard that can arise in
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
Wear eye protection and down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
228 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:12:49 32SJD620_232
Maintenance Schedule
The required maintenance schedule The maintenance schedule assumes We recommend the use of genuine
specifies all maintenance required to you will use your vehicle as normal Honda parts and fluids or their
keep your vehicle in peak operating transportation for passengers and equivalent whenever you have
condition. Maintenance work should their possessions. You should also maintenance done. These are the
be performed in accordance with the follow these recommendations: same high-quality items that went
standards and specifications of into your vehicle when it was new, so
Honda by properly trained and Avoid exceeding your vehicles you can be sure they fit and perform
equipped technicians. Your load limit. This puts excess stress flawlessly.
authorized dealer meets all of these on the engine, brakes, and many
requirements. other vehicle parts.
There are two types of maintenance Operate your vehicle on On diesel models only
schedule in this owners manual. One reasonable roads within the legal Do not press the engine cover
is for petrol models (see pages 231 to speed limit. forcibly. This may damage the
233 ), and the other is for diesel engine cover and component parts.
models (see pages 234 235 ). Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several kilometres
In EU countries, follow the (miles).
maintenance schedule in the Service
Book that came with your vehicle. On petrol models
Always use the recommended
In New Zealand, follow the petrol only (see page 184 ).
maintenance schedule in the service
maintenance and warranty book that On diesel models
came with your vehicle. Always use the recommended
diesel fuel only (see page 184 ).
Maintenance 229
06/10/30 17:13:04 32SJD620_233
Maintenance Schedule
Owners Maintenance Checks Windscreen wipers Check the Battery Check its condition and
You should check the following wiper condition monthly. If the the terminals for corrosion
items at the use or specified intervals. wipers do not wipe the windscreen monthly. See page 281 .
securely, check them for wear,
Engine oil level cracks, and other damage. Air conditioning system Check
Check every time you fill the fuel its operation weekly. See page 270 .
tank. See page 188 . Brakes and clutch Check the
fluid level monthly. See page 250 . Windscreen demister Operate
Engine coolant level the heater and air conditioning
On petrol models Brake pedal Check the brake and check the demister vents
Check the radiator reserve tank pedal for smooth operation. monthly.
every time you fill the fuel tank.
See page 189 . Parking brake Check the Lights Check the operation of
parking brake handle for smooth the headlights, position lights, tail-
On diesel models operation. lights, high-mount brake light,
Check the expansion tank every turn signals, and licence plate
time you fill the fuel tank. See Tyres Check the tyre pressure lights monthly. See page 256 .
page 190 . monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page Doors Check the tailgate and
Windscreen washer fluid Check 274 . all doors including the rear doors
the level in the reservoir monthly. for smooth opening/closing and
If weather conditions cause you to secure locking.
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop Horn Check the horn operation.
for fuel. See page 248 .
230 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:13:22 32SJD620_234
Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU and New Zealand)

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This maintenance schedule
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-
M A I N T E N A N C E
Severe2 Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter1 Normal free operation of your vehicle.
Severe2 Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months Due to regional and climatic
Clean air cleaner element Dry type only Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) differences, some additional
Replace air cleaner element Dry type Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) servicing may be required.
Wet type Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) Please consult your warranty
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
booklet for a more detailed
Replace fuel filter3
Replace spark plugs Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
description.
Inspect drive belt
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, thereafter
every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
1 : Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.
S C H E D U L E
2 : Refer to page 233 for replacement information under severe conditions.
3 : Refer to page 255 for replacement information under severe driving conditions.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 231
06/10/30 17:13:36 32SJD620_235

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace transmission fluid MT Normal
S C H E D U L E
Severe1
AT Normal
Severe1
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of distance)
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months

Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
232 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:13:45 32SJD620_236
NOTE:
If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe
conditions, the following items must be serviced according to the
maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.
Severe driving conditions:

A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35C (95F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing (if applicable), driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving
in mountainous conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
Items Condition
S C H E D U L E
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E
Transmission fluid B, D
Maintenance 233
06/10/30 17:14:02 32SJD620_237
Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This maintenance schedule
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-
S C H E D U L E
and oil filter1 Severe2 Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months

Replace air cleaner element Normal Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) free operation of your vehicle.
(wet type) Severe2 Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) Due to regional and climatic
Replace fuel filter differences, some additional
Inspect drive belt servicing may be required.
Replace engine coolant Please consult your warranty
Replace manual transmission fluid Normal
booklet for a more detailed
Severe2
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
description.
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of distance)
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)

Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
1 : Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.
234 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:14:10 32SJD620_238
Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)
NOTE:
If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe
conditions, the following items must be serviced according to the
maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.
Severe driving conditions:

A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35C (95F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing (if applicable), driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving
in mountainous conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
Items Condition
S C H E D U L E
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E
Air cleaner element D, E
Manual transmission B, D
fluid
Maintenance 235
06/10/30 17:14:18 32SJD620_239
Maintenance Record (Except EU and New Zealand)
Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
20,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 120,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
12,500 Mi. 75,000 Mi.
(or 12 Mo.) (or 72 Mo.)
Date Date
25,000 Mi. 87,500 Mi.
(or 24 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date
37,500 Mi. 100,000 Mi.
(or 36 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date
50,000 Mi. 112,500 Mi.
(or 48 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date
62,500 Mi. 125,000 Mi.
(or 60 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date
236 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:14:23 32SJD620_240
Fluid Locations
Petrol models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK CLUTCH FLUID
(Orange handle) (Manual Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
POWER STEERING FLUID

(Red cap) BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR
CONTINUED
Maintenance 237
06/10/30 17:14:27 32SJD620_241
Fluid Locations
Diesel models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP CLUTCH FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE COOLANT BRAKE FLUID

EXPANSION TANK (Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange loop)
238 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:14:36 32SJD620_242
Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and You can select the proper SAE/
tighten it securely. Let the engine ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle
warm up and turn off the engine, let according to this chart:
it sit for approximately 3 minutes,
then check the oil level on the
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above
the upper mark; you could damage
the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil

European models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Oil is a major contributor to your
engines performance and longevity.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Always use a premium-grade
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in detergent oil. It is highly Ambient Temperature
the oil slowly and carefully so you do recommended that you use genuine
not spill any. Clean up any spills Honda Motor Oil, ACEA A1/B1, Always use genuine Honda Motor
immediately. Spilled oil could ACEA A3/B3, or ACEA A5/B5 Oil or a fuel-efficient oil that says
damage components in the engine in your vehicle for as long as you ACEA A1/B1 ACEA A3/B3, or
compartment. own it. ACEA A5/B5. This oil is
formulated to help your engine use
less fuel.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 239
06/10/30 17:14:43 32SJD620_243
Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)
Except for European models Always use a fuel-efficient oil that

Oil is a major contributor to your says API Service SL or higher grade.
engines performance and longevity. This oil is formulated to help your
Always use a premium-grade deter- engine use less fuel.
gent oil. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor Engine Oil Additives
Oil in your vehicle for as long as you Your vehicle does not require any oil
own it. additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engines or transmissions
You can select the proper SAE performance and durability.
viscosity oil for your vehicle
according to this chart:
Ambient Temperature
240 Driving
06/10/30 17:14:52 32SJD620_244
Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and You can select the proper ACEA/
tighten it securely. Let the engine SAE viscosity oil for your vehicle
warm up and turn off the engine, let according to this chart:
it sit for approximately 3 minutes,
then check the oil level on the
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above
the upper mark; you could damage
the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil

Always use a synthetic motor oil that
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP meets the ACEA specifications, and
is the proper weight as shown in the
Unscrew and remove the engine oil following chart. When using
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in synthetic oil, you must follow the oil Ambient Temperature
the oil slowly and carefully so you do and filter change intervals given in
not spill any. Clean up any spills the maintenance schedule. NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated to
immediately. Spilled oil could improve fuel economy.
damage components in the engine On Vehicles without DPF
compartment. It is highly recommended that you
use genuine Honda Motor Oil or
0W-30 synthetic motor oil meeting
the minimum specification: ACEA
A1/B1, ACEA A3/B3, or ACEA
A5/B5.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 241
06/10/30 17:14:59 32SJD620_245
Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)
On Vehicles with DPF only You can select the proper ACEA/ Engine Oil Additives
It is highly recommended that you SAE viscosity oil for your vehicle Your vehicle does not require any oil
use genuine Honda Motor Oil or according to this chart: additives. Additives may adversely
0W-30 synthetic motor oil meeting affect the engine or transmission
the minimum specification: ACEA performance and durability.
C2 or ACEA C3.
NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated to

improve fuel economy.
242 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:15:06 32SJD620_246
Engine Coolant (Petrol models)
Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All The cooling system contains many
Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. aluminium components that can
This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 corrode if an improper antifreeze is
percent antifreeze and 50 percent used. Some antifreeze, even though
water. It does not require any labelled as safe for aluminium parts,
additional mixing. Never add straight may not provide adequate protection.
antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve

tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 243
06/10/30 17:15:13 32SJD620_247
4. The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add
Removing the radiator cap RADIATOR CAP coolant if it is low.
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray Pour the coolant slowly and
out, seriously scalding you. carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spills immediately; it
Always let the engine and could damage components in the
radiator cool down before engine compartment.
removing the radiator cap.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
1. Make sure the engine and radiator tighten it fully.
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling

system by turning the radiator cap
anticlockwise, without pressing
down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.
244 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:15:19 32SJD620_248
7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
RESERVE TANK
6. Remove the reserve tank cap.
Maintenance 245
06/10/30 17:15:26 32SJD620_249
Engine Coolant (Diesel models)
Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All The cooling system contains many
Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. aluminium components that can
EXPANSION TANK This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 corrode if an improper antifreeze is
percent antifreeze and 50 percent used. Some antifreeze, even though
water. Never add straight antifreeze labelled as safe for aluminium parts,
or plain water. may not provide adequate protection.
Removing the expansion

tank cap while the engine is
hot can cause the coolant to
MAX MIN
spray out, seriously scalding
you.
If the coolant level in the expansion
tank is at or below the MIN line, add Always let the engine and
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. radiator cool down before
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. removing the expansion tank
cap.
246 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:15:34 32SJD620_250
Engine Coolant (Diesel models)
5. Put the expansion tank cap back

on, and tighten it fully.
RADIATOR CAP
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
EXPANSION TANK MAX LINE
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the MAX line. Add coolant if it is
low.
2. Loosen the expansion tank cap by
turning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise. Pour the coolant slowly and
This will relieve any remaining carefully so you do not spill any.
pressure in the cooling system. Clean up any spills immediately; it
could damage components in the
3. Remove the expansion tank cap by engine compartment.
pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.
Maintenance 247
06/10/30 17:15:41 32SJD620_251
Windscreen Washers
Check the fluid level in the Petrol models Diesel models

windscreen washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the reservoirs fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality

windscreen washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather. LEVEL GAUGE
When you refill the reservoir, clean

the edges of the windscreen wiper
blades with windscreen washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to Do not use engine antifreeze or a
condition the blade edges. vinegar/water solution in the
windscreen washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicles
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windscreen washer
pump. Use only commercially-
available windscreen washer fluid.
248 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:15:51 32SJD620_252
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission Fluid

The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Always use genuine Honda Manual

Transmission Fluid (MTF). If it is UPPER
not available, you may use an API MARK
service SE or higher grade motor oil LOWER
with a viscosity of SAE 0W-20 or MARK
5W-20 as a temporary replacement. DIPSTICK
However, motor oil does not contain
the proper additives, and continued Check the fluid level with the engine 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
use can cause stiffer shifting. and transmission at normal operating from the transmission, and wipe it
Replace as soon as it is convenient. temperature. with a clean cloth.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
Start the engine and let it run until into the transmission securely as
the radiator fan comes on, then shown in the illustration.
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but dont
wait longer than 90 seconds.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 249
06/10/30 17:16:00 32SJD620_253
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check Always use genuine Honda Brake and Clutch Fluid
the fluid level. It should be ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Check the fluid level in the
between the upper and lower Fluid). If it is not available, you reservoirs monthly.
marks. may use a DEXRON III
automatic transmission fluid as a Brake fluid reservoir
5. If the level is below the lower temporary replacement. However, Clutch fluid reservoir
mark, add fluid into the dipstick continued use can affect the shift (Manual transmission only)
hole to bring it to the level quality. Have the transmission
between the upper and lower flushed and refilled with genuine Replace the brake fluid according to
marks. Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer as the time recommendation in the
soon as it is convenient. maintenance schedule.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Always use genuine Honda Brake
any spills immediately; it could into the transmission securely as Fluid or an equivalent from a sealed
damage components in the engine shown in the illustration. container that is marked DOT3 or
compartment. DOT4 only. Brake fluid marked
If you are not sure how to add fluid, DOT5 is not compatible with your
contact your dealer. vehicles braking system.
250 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:16:07 32SJD620_254
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake System Clutch System

MAX MAX
MIN
MIN
The fluid level should be between The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or of the reservoir. If it is not, add
below the MIN mark, your brake brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
system needs attention. Have the Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system inspected for leaks or brake system.
worn brake pads.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
Maintenance 251
06/10/30 17:16:13 32SJD620_255
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so A low power steering fluid level can
you do not spill any. Clean up any indicate a leak in the system. Check
spills immediately; it could damage the fluid level frequently, and have
components in the engine the system inspected as soon as
compartment. possible.
Using automatic transmission fluid Turning the steering wheel to full

or another brand of power steering left or right lock and holding it there
fluid will damage the system. Use can damage the power steering
Petrol model is shown. LOWER LEVEL only genuine Honda Power Steering pump.
Fluid (V, II or S).
You should check the fluid level in
the power steering reservoir at least
once a year. Check the level on the
side of the reservoir when the
engine is cold. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If not, add power
steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL
mark.
252 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:16:26 32SJD620_256
Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element should be Replacement

cleaned or replaced according to the Petrol models
time and distance recommendations
in the maintenance schedule. CLIPS
Cleaning
On vehicles with dry type air cleaner
element
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing in the engine
compartment.
Clean the air cleaner element by

blowing compressed air through it in AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
the opposite direction to normal air
flow. If you do not have access to To replace it: 3. Carefully clean the inside of the
compressed air (such as a service air cleaner housing with a damp
station), ask your dealer to do this 1. Unsnap the four hold-down clips rag.
service. and remove the air cleaner
housing cover. 4. Place the new air cleaner element
Follow the replacement procedure in the air cleaner housing.
for removal and reinstallation. 2. Remove the old air cleaner
element. 5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and snap the four hold-
down clips back into place.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 253
06/10/30 17:16:34 32SJD620_257
Air Cleaner Element
4. Place the new air cleaner element

Diesel models in the air cleaner housing.
5. Pull down the front of the air

cleaner housing cover and tighten
the four bolts securely.
AIR CLEANER
WRENCH ELEMENT
BOLTS
1. Loosen the four bolts with the 2. Pull up the front of the air cleaner
wrench included in the tool kit housing cover, and then remove
(see page 298 ). the old air cleaner element.
Make sure to locate the air cleaner 3. Carefully clean the inside of the
housing bolts as shown. Do not air cleaner housing with a damp
loosen the socket bolt holding the rag.
air flow meter.
254 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:16:43 32SJD620_258
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter should be replaced Draining Water After the vehicle has been stored for
according to the time and distance (Diesel models only) an extended period, the engine may
recommendations in the mainte- When water stays in the fuel system, not start. This may be caused by air
nance schedule. the Water In Diesel Filter indicator in the fuel system. In this case,
comes on and stays on while the follow the procedure for Priming
Have a qualified technician change engine is running. Contact your the Fuel System (see page 284 ).
the fuel filter. Since the fuel system dealer as soon as possible (see page
is under pressure, fuel can spray out 284 ).
and create a hazard if all fuel line
connections are not handled On European models
correctly. The fuel filter should be drained of
water according to the time and
Except EU (Petrol models only) distance recommendations in the
It is recommended to replace the maintenance schedule.
fuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000
miles), or 2 years, if the fuel you are
using is suspected to be
contaminated. In a high dust
environment, the filter may become
clogged sooner.
Maintenance 255
06/10/30 17:16:48 32SJD620_259
Lights
Check the operation of your vehicles

exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can make the
condition of your vehicle unsafe
reducing your vehicles visibility and
the ability to signal your intentions to
other drivers.
SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT2
POSITION
LIGHT
HEADLIGHT
FRONT FOG LIGHT1

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
1 : For some types

2 : Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.
256 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:17:00 32SJD620_260
Lights
Check the following:

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Headlights (low and high beam)
Position lights
Tail-lights
Brake lights
Turn signals
REAR TURN Side turn signals
SIGNAL LIGHT Back-up lights
Hazard light function
Licence plate lights
High-mount brake light
Rear fog light (for some types)
STOP/TAIL-LIGHT Front fog lights (for some types)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,

replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 335 to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
REAR FOG LIGHT1 REAR FOG LIGHT2
BACK-UP LIGHT LICENCE PLATE LIGHTS
1 : Left-hand drive type

2 : For some right-hand drive type
Maintenance 257
06/10/30 17:17:09 32SJD620_261
Lights
Headlight Aiming Headlights with High Voltage Replacing a Headlight Bulb

The headlights were properly aimed Discharge Tubes Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you (For some types) bulbs (for some types), one on each
regularly carry heavy items in the The headlight bulbs are a type of side. When replacing a bulb, handle
luggage area or pull a trailer (if high voltage discharge tube. High it by its steel base and protect the
applicable), readjustment may be voltage can remain in the circuit glass from contact with your skin or
required. Adjustment should be done even with the light switch off and the hard objects. If you touch the glass,
by your dealer or other qualified key removed. Because of this, you clean it with denatured alcohol and a
technician. should not attempt to examine or clean cloth.
change a headlight bulb yourself. If a
On vehicles with headlight adjuster headlight bulb fails, take your
The vertical angle of the headlights vehicle to a dealer to have it replaced.
can be adjusted. For more Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
information, see page 122 . when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
scratch on the glass can cause the
On vehicles with high voltage discharge bulb to overheat and shatter.
type headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic headlight adjusting
system that adjusts the vertical angle
of the headlights automatically.
Refer to page 122 for more
information.
258 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:17:19 32SJD620_262
Lights
WEATHER SEAL BULB

5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
6. Install the rubber weather seal

over the back of the headlight
assembly. Make sure it is right
side up.
CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE 7. Push the electrical connector onto

the tabs of the new bulb. Make
1. Open the bonnet. 3. Remove the rubber weather seal sure it locks in place.
by pulling it. Turn on the headlights to test the
2. Remove the electrical connector new bulb.
from the bulb by pulling the 4. Unclip the end of the hold-down
connector straight off. wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
Maintenance 259
06/10/30 17:17:29 32SJD620_263
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal

Light Bulb
Left side AIR DUCT Left side HOLDING CLIP Right side WINDSCREEN WASHER
RESERVOIR TANK
HOLDING
CLIP
WINDSCREEN WASHER
Petrol models Diesel models RESERVOIR TANK Petrol models
1. Open the bonnet. Diesel models (Right side)

Remove the upper part of the Petrol models
(Left side) windscreen washer reservoir tank. Remove the upper part of the
Petrol models windscreen washer reservoir tank.
Remove the air duct by pulling it Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
straight out. remove the holding clip, then Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the upper part. remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part.
260 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:17:40 32SJD620_264
Lights
5. Test the lights to make sure the

new bulb is working.
Right side SOCKET 6. (Left side)
BULB Petrol models
Install the air duct into its hole.
Diesel models
Install the upper part of the
windscreen washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
(Right side)
Diesel models Petrol models
Install the upper part of the
Diesel models 2. Remove the socket from the windscreen washer reservoir tank
Remove the power steering fluid headlight assembly by turning it in the reverse order of removal.
tank. one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
Diesel models
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Install the power steering fluid
socket. Push the new bulb straight tank.
into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Maintenance 261
06/10/30 17:17:51 32SJD620_265
Lights
Replacing a Front Position Light 5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
Bulb socket. Push the new bulb straight
Left side
7. Turn on the position lights to

make sure the new bulb works.
8. Put the inner fender cover back

into its place. Install the holding
Diesel models HOLDING CLIPS clips. Lock each clip by pushing in
the centre.
On diesel models 2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
1. If you are changing the bulb on remove the two holding clips from
the left side, start the engine, turn the inner fender.
the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and turn off the engine. 3. Pull the inner fender cover back.
If you are changing the bulb on
the right side, turn the steering 4. Remove the socket from the
wheel to the left. headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
262 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:18:00 32SJD620_266
Lights
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Replacing Rear Bulbs

socket. Push the new bulb straight
Right side BULB
5. Turn on the position lights to

make sure the new bulb works.
Petrol models SOCKET

1. To access the bulbs, remove the
On petrol models cover for the side of the blown
1. Open the bonnet. bulb. Open the tailgate.
Disconnect the band connector of
2. Remove the socket from the the cover. Remove the cover by
headlight assembly by turning it carefully prying on its edge with a
one-quarter turn anticlockwise. small flat-tipped screwdriver.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 263
06/10/30 17:18:11 32SJD620_267
Lights
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its Replacing a High-mount Brake

socket. Light Bulb
5. Install the new bulb in the socket. HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE

LIGHT ASSEMBLY
6. Test the lights to make sure the SCREW
new bulb is working.
Reinstall the socket by turning it
clockwise until it locks.
7. Reinstall the cover.

Connect the band connector.
2. Determine which of the four bulbs SCREW COVERS

is burned out: stop/tail-light, back-
up light, turn signal light or rear 1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
fog light. cover. Remove the covers by
carefully prying on the edge with a
3. Remove the socket by turning it small flat-tipped screwdriver.
one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the two screws, then
remove the high-mount brake
light assembly.
264 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:18:20 32SJD620_268
Lights
4. Test the lights to make sure the Replacing a Rear Licence Plate
new bulb is working. Bulb
5. Put the socket back into the light

assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
6. Reinstall the high-mount brake

light assembly into the tailgate.
Tighten the two screws and
reinstall the covers.
BULB
SOCKET
2. Remove the socket from the light 1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
assembly by turning it one-quarter the edge of the cover. Remove it
turn anticlockwise. by carefully prying in the notch on
its middle edge with a small flat-
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its tipped screwdriver.
socket. Push the new bulb straight
CONTINUED
Maintenance 265
06/10/30 17:18:32 32SJD620_269
Lights
4. Turn on the position lights and FRONT FOG

check that the new bulb is LIGHT COVER
working.
5. Reinstall the socket. Snap the

cover back in place. SCREW
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

(For some types)
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the COVERS SCREW
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, 1. Place a cloth on the edge of each
clean it with denatured alcohol and a cover. Remove the covers by
2. Remove the licence light assembly clean cloth. carefully prying in the notch on its
by squeezing the tabs on both edge with a small flat-tipped
sides of the socket. screwdriver.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Halogen light bulbs get very hot 2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
socket. Push the new bulb in until when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a remove the screws.
it bottoms in the socket. scratch on the glass can cause the
bulb to overheat and shatter. 3. Remove the front fog light cover.
266 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:18:41 32SJD620_270
Lights
7. Insert the new bulb into the hole,

and turn it one-quarter turn
8. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
BULB 9. Turn on the front fog lights to test

the new bulb.
FRONT FOG LIGHT CONNECTOR
SCREWS ASSEMBLY 10. Reinstall the front fog light
assembly back in place, then
4. Remove the front fog light 5. Remove the electrical connector tighten the screws.
assembly by removing the screws. from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then 11. Reinstall the front fog light cover,
slide the connector off the bulb. then tighten the screws and
reinstall the covers.
6. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
anticlockwise.
Maintenance 267
06/10/30 17:18:49 32SJD620_271
Lights
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior CEILING LIGHT SPOTLIGHTS

Lights BULB
The ceiling lights and spotlights
come apart the same way.
1. Remove the lens by carefully

prying on the edge of it with a BULB
fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
For some types
Ceiling light: Spotlights:

Pry on the front edge of the lens 1. Pry on the inner edge of both
near both sides. spotlights.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its metal tabs.
268 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:18:58 32SJD620_272
Lights
SPOTLIGHTS BULB SPOTLIGHTS
BULBS
On vehicles with sunroof For some types LENSES
3. Push the new bulb into the metal 1. Check which bulb is burned out. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
tabs. Carefully snap the lens back Push on the lens of the opposite straight out of the bulb holder.
in place. side you are replacing.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
2. Remove the lens of the burned out holder.
bulb by carefully prying on the
edge between the lenses with a 5. Reinstall the lens in place.
fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver.
Maintenance 269
06/10/30 17:19:05 32SJD620_273
Air Conditioning System
Your vehicles air conditioning is a Periodically check the engines If the air conditioning does not get as
sealed system. Any major radiator and air conditioning cold as before, have your dealer
maintenance, such as recharging, condenser for leaves, insects, and check the system. Recharge the
should be done by a qualified dirt stuck to the front surface. These system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
technician. You can do a couple of block the air flow and reduce cooling (R-134a).
things to make sure the air efficiency. Use a light spray from a
conditioning works efficiently. hose or a soft brush to remove them.
Whenever you have the air

conditioning system serviced, make
The condenser and radiator fins sure the service facility uses a
bend easily. Only use a low-pressure refrigerant recycling system. This
spray or soft-bristle brush to clean system captures the refrigerant for
them. reuse. Releasing refrigerant into the
atmosphere can damage the
Run the air conditioning at least once environment.
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least 10
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
270 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:19:12 32SJD620_274
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a front wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm by pushing in
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
windscreen. Raise the drivers side while you push the blade assembly
first, then the passengers side. toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the bonnet when the

wiper arms are raised, or you will
damage the bonnet and the wiper
arms.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 271
06/10/30 17:19:19 32SJD620_275
Wiper Blades
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

BLADE holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windscreen, the passengers
side first, then the drivers side.
BLADE REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
272 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:19:27 32SJD620_276
Wiper Blades
4. Slide the new wiper blade into the

BLADE holder until the tabs lock.
5. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
6. Lower the wiper arm.
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
To replace a rear wiper blade: 3. Examine the new wiper blades. If

they have no plastic or metal
1. Raise the wiper arm off the reinforcement along the back
windscreen. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
2. Remove the blade from its holder wiper blade, and install them in
by grasping the tabbed end of the the slots along the edge of the new
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs blade.
come out of the holder.
Maintenance 273
06/10/30 17:19:36 32SJD620_277
Tyres
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air
tyres must be the proper type and Keeping the tyres properly inflated pressure in each tyre at least once a
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of month. Even tyres that are in good
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1
comfort. to 0.2 kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month.
The following pages give more Remember to check the spare tyre at
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tyres wear unevenly, the same time.
care of your tyres and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to Check the air pressures when the
fail from being overheated. tyres are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
Overinflated tyres can make your hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1
Using tyres that are vehicle ride more harshly, are mile).
excessively worn or more prone to damage from road
improperly inflated can cause hazards, and wear unevenly. Add or release air, if needed, to
a crash in which you can be match the recommended cold tyre
seriously hurt or killed. We recommend that you visually pressures on a label on the drivers
check your tyres every day. If you doorjamb.
Follow all instructions in this think a tyre might be low, check it
owners manual regarding immediately with a tyre gauge.
tyre inflation and
maintenance.
274 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:19:46 32SJD620_278
Tyres
If you check air pressures when the Tyre Inspection TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
tyres are hot [driven for several Every time you check inflation, you
kilometers (miles)], you will see should also examine the tyres for
readings 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4 damage, foreign objects, and wear.
kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher than the You should look for:
cold reading. This is normal. Do not
let air out to match the Bumps or bulges in the tread or
recommended cold air pressure. The side of the tyre. Replace the tyre if
tyre will be underinflated. you find either of these conditions.
While tubeless tyres have some Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
ability to self-seal if they are of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
punctured, you should look closely can see fabric or cord.
for punctures if a tyre starts losing Your tyres have wear indicators
pressure. Excessive tread wear. moulded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 12.7
You should use your own tyre mm (1/2 inch) wide band across the
pressure gauge whenever you check tread. This shows there is less than
your tyre pressures. This will make it 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left on
easier for you to tell if a pressure the tyre.
loss is due to a tyre problem and not A tyre this worn gives very little
due to a variation between gauges. traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tyre if you can see three
For convenience, the recommended or more tread wear indicators.
tyre sizes and cold tyre pressures are
on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
Maintenance 275
06/10/30 17:19:55 32SJD620_279
Tyres
Tyre Maintenance Tyre Rotation If you purchase directional tyres,

In addition to proper inflation, rotate only front-to-back.
correct wheel alignment helps to Front
decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre When the tyres are rotated, make
is worn unevenly, have your dealer sure the air pressures are checked.
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tyres if

you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tyre should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tyres (For non-directional (For directional
installed, make sure they are tyres and wheels) tyres and wheels)
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tyre life. For best To help increase tyre life and
results, have the installer perform a distribute wear more evenly, rotate
dynamic balance. the tyres every 10,000 km (6,250
miles). Move the tyres to the
positions shown in the chart each
time they are rotated. The above
For vehicles equipped with aluminium illustration shows how the tyres
wheels: should be rotated on the vehicles
Improper wheel weights can damage equipped with a compact spare tyre.
your vehicles aluminium wheels.
Use only genuine Honda wheel
weights for balancing.
276 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:20:02 32SJD620_280
Tyres
Replacing Tyres and Wheels It is best to replace all four tyres at

Replace your tyres with radial tyres the same time. If that is not possible
of the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tyres on
rating, and maximum cold tyre tyres or two rear tyres as a pair. your vehicle can affect
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tyre can seriously handling and stability. This
tyres sidewall). affect your vehicles handling. can cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or
Mixing radial and bias-ply tyres on If you ever replace a wheel, make killed.
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheels specifications
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels. Always use the size and type
accuracy. Using tyres of a different Consult your dealer before replacing of tyres recommended in the
size or construction can cause the tyres. tyre information label on
ABS and vehicle stability assist your vehicle.
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
The ABS and VSA work by

comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tyres, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tyre size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to work
inconsistently.
Maintenance 277
06/10/30 17:20:10 32SJD620_281
Tyres
Wheels and Tyres Winter Tyres Install the winter tyres according to
Wheels: Because of the limited winter the remarks in the registration paper.
16 x 6 1/2 JJ qualification of summer tyres for According to the EEC Directive for
winter use we recommend the use of tyres, when winter tyres are used, it
Tyres: winter tyres (MS tyres) on snowy is necessary to affix a sticker with
205/55R16 91V and icy roads. If MS tyres are the allowable max. speed of the
installed, all four wheels should be winter tyres clearly in the field of
See the tyre information label on the equipped to insure safe driving. Use view of the driver, if the designed
drivers doorjamb or ask your dealer only tyres of the same brand with max. speed of vehicle is higher than
for information on the proper size of the same profile. Pay attention to the the allowed max. speed of winter
the tyres on your vehicle. tyre size, load capacity and speed tyre. A sticker is obtainable from
class when buying. your tyre dealer. If any questions
Replacement wheels are available at arise, please discuss these with one
your dealer. of our dealers.
278 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:20:14 32SJD620_282
Tyres
Tyre Chains When you have installed tyre chains,

Use snow chains only in an drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph)
emergency or when they are legally on roads covered with snow or ice.
required for driving through a To minimize tyre and chain wear,
certain area. Install the snow chains avoid driving on cleared roads with
on the front wheels. Use greater chains installed.
caution when driving with snow
chains on snow or ice. They may
have less-predictable handling than
good winter tyres without chains.
Some snow chains may damage the
vehicles tyres, wheels, suspension
and body. Choose only fine limbed
chains which guarantee enough free
space between the tyre and the other
vehicle parts in the wheelhouse. Pay
attention to the sectional assembly
view and other directions from the
chain manufacturer. Consult your
dealer before purchasing any type of
chains for your vehicle.
Maintenance 279
06/10/30 17:20:19 32SJD620_283
Tyres
(EU models)
Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.
Original Tyre Size Chain Type
205/55R16 Rud-matic classic 48482 or equivalents
280 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:20:26 32SJD620_284
Checking the Battery
Petrol models Diesel models If additional battery maintenance is

needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicles
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative () cable first, and
reconnect it last.
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a
monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To
indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
battery explains the test indicators solution of baking soda and water. It
colours. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 281
06/10/30 17:20:33 32SJD620_285
Checking the Battery
Emergency Procedures
The battery gives off The battery contains sulfuric Eyes Flush with water from a cup
explosive hydrogen gas acid (electrolyte) which is or other container for at least 15
during normal operation. A highly corrosive and minutes. (Water under pressure can
spark or open flame can poisonous. damage the eye.) Call a physician
cause the battery to explode immediately.
with enough force to kill or Getting electrolyte in your
seriously hurt you. eyes or on your skin can Skin Remove contaminated
cause serious burns. Wear clothing. Flush the skin with large
Keep all sparks, open flames, protective clothing and eye quantities of water. Call a physician
and smoking materials away protection when working on immediately.
from the battery. or near the battery.
Swallowing Drink water or milk.
Wear protective clothing and Swallowing electrolyte can Call a physician immediately.
a face shield, or have a skilled cause fatal poisoning if
technician do the battery immediate action is not
maintenance. taken.
KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF

CHILDREN
282 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:20:44 32SJD620_286
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 breathable cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tyres are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front and rear wiper
completely. blade arms with a folded towel or On diesel models only
rag so they do not touch the After you parked the vehicle for
Clean the interior. Make sure the windscreen. an extended period, water stays in
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are the fuel system and the engine will
completely dry. To minimize sticking, apply a not start. In this case, the fuel
silicone spray lubricant to all door filter may be needed to drain off
Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a water (see Draining Water on
the transmission in reverse vehicle body wax to the painted page 255 ).
(manual) or Park (automatic). surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 283
06/10/30 17:20:54 32SJD620_287
Vehicle Storage
If you store your vehicle for 1 year or Priming the Fuel System FUEL HAND PRIMER
longer, have your dealer perform the (Diesel models only)
maintenance inspections called for in If your vehicle runs out of fuel, the
the 2 years/40,000 km (25,000 miles) malfunction indicator lamp will come
maintenance schedule as soon as on, or the glow plugs indicator will
you take it out of storage (see page blink, and the engine will not restart
229 ). The replacements called for in after refueling the fuel tank with the
the maintenance schedule are not appropriate fuel (see pages 315 and
needed unless the vehicle has 316 ).
actually reached that time or
distance. In this case, air may have entered
the fuel system. The system requires
: For EU countries, see the priming to start the engine. Prime
Service Book. the fuel system as follows: 3. Squeeze the fuel hand primer until
you feel the strong resistance.
1. Refuel the fuel tank (minimum 5
litres).
2. Open the bonnet. Do not press the engine cover

forcibly. This may damage the
engine cover and component parts.
284 Maintenance
06/10/30 17:21:01 32SJD620_288
Vehicle Storage
4. Start the engine (see page 203 ). If 5. If the engine fails to start, return If this procedure is performed
the engine does not start right to step 3. during normal driving, the indicator
away, do not hold the ignition will be turned off.
switch for more than 10 seconds at 6. After the engine restarts, press
a time. This will damage the fuel the accelerator pedal slightly and If you are not sure how to bleed the
pump and the engine starter. hold it at approximately 1,500 rpm air, contact your dealer.
for about 30 seconds. This will
complete the air bleeding in the If the engine fails to restart after
fuel system. priming the fuel system, there is a
problem in the fuel system. You
7. The engine runs normally, but the should have the vehicle inspected by
malfunction indicator lamp or the your dealer.
glow plugs indicator remains lit.
To turn off the indicator, restart and

turn off the engine at least three
times at intervals of approximately
30 seconds.
Maintenance 285
06/10/30 17:21:03 32SJD620_289
286
06/10/30 17:21:07 32SJD620_290
Appearance Care
Regular cleaning and polishing of Exterior Care.................................. 288

your vehicle helps to keep it new Washing ...................................... 288
looking. This section gives you Roof Antenna ............................. 289
information on how to clean your Waxing ........................................ 289
vehicle and preserve its appearance: Aluminium Wheels .................... 290
the paint, brightwork, wheels and Paint Touch-up ........................... 290
interior. Also included are several Interior Care ................................... 291
things you can do to help prevent Carpeting .................................... 291
corrosion. Floor Mats .................................. 291
Fabric .......................................... 291
Vinyl ............................................ 291
Leather ........................................ 292
Windows ..................................... 292
Seat Belts .................................... 292
Air Fresheners ........................... 293
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 293
Corrosion Protection ..................... 294
Appearance Care 287

06/10/30 17:21:16 32SJD620_291
Exterior Care
Washing Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with When you have washed and rinsed
Frequent washing helps preserve cool water to remove loose dirt. the whole exterior, dry it with a
your vehicles beauty. Dirt and grit chamois or soft towel. Letting it
can scratch the paint, while tree sap Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix air-dry will cause dulling and water
and bird droppings can permanently in a product made especially for spots.
ruin the finish. car washing.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
Wash your vehicle in a shady area, Wash the vehicle using water and chips and scratches that could allow
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is detergent solution and a soft- corrosion to start. Repair them with
parked in the sun, move it into the bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth. touch-up paint (see page 290 ).
shade and let the exterior cool down Start at the top and work your way
before you start. down. Rinse frequently.
Only use the solvents and cleaners Check the body for road tar, tree
recommended in this owners sap, etc. Remove these stains with
manual. tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
Chemical solvents and strong the vehicle does not need waxing.
cleaners can damage the paint, metal,
and plastic on your vehicle.
288 Appearance Care

06/10/30 17:21:24 32SJD620_292
Exterior Care
Roof Antenna Waxing Polishes Polishes and cleaner/

Always wash and dry the whole waxes can restore the shine to paint
vehicle before waxing it. You should that has oxidized and lost some of its
wax your vehicle, including the metal shine. They normally contain mild
trim, whenever water sits on the abrasives and solvents that remove
surface in large patches. It should the top layer of the finish. You
form into beads or droplets after should use a polish on your vehicle if
waxing. the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
instructions on the container. In removers also takes off the wax.
general, there are two types of Remember to re-wax those areas,
products: even if the rest of the vehicle does
Your vehicle is equipped with a roof not need waxing.
antenna on the rear centre of the Waxes A wax coats the finish and
roof. If you use a drive-through car protects it from damage by exposure
wash, make sure you remove the to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
antenna first by turning it by hand. should use a wax on your vehicle
This prevents the antenna from when it is new.
being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
Afterward, reinstall the antenna and

tighten it securely by hand.
Appearance Care 289

06/10/30 17:21:31 32SJD620_293
Exterior Care
Aluminium Wheels Paint Touch-up

(For some types) Your dealer has touch-up paint to
Clean your vehicles aluminium alloy match your vehicles colour. The
wheels as you do the rest of the colour code is printed on a plate
exterior. Wash them with the same attached to the left damper housing
solution, and rinse them thoroughly. in the engine compartment. Take
this code to your dealer so you are
The wheels have a protective sure to get the correct colour.
clearcoat that keeps the aluminium
from corroding and tarnishing. Using Inspect your vehicle frequently for
harsh chemicals, including some chips or scratches in the paint.
commercial wheel cleaners or stiff Repair them right away to prevent
brushes, can damage this clear-coat. corrosion of the metal underneath.
Only use a mild detergent and soft Use the touch-up paint only on small
brush or sponge to clean the wheels. chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
290 Appearance Care

06/10/30 17:21:40 32SJD620_294
Interior Care
Carpeting Floor Mats Fabric

Vacuum the carpeting frequently to If equipped Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make The drivers floor mat that came material frequently. For general
the carpet wear out faster. with your vehicle hooks over the cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
Periodically shampoo the carpet to floor mat anchors. This keeps the and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
keep it looking new. Use one of the floor mat from sliding forward and To clean off stubborn spots, use a
foam-type carpet cleaners on the possibly interfering with the pedals. commercially-available fabric cleaner.
market. Follow the instructions that Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
come with the cleaner, applying it If you remove the drivers floor mat, first, to make sure it does not bleach
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep make sure to re-anchor it when you or stain the fabric. Follow the
the carpeting as dry as possible by put it back in your vehicle. instructions that come with the
not adding water to the foam. cleaner.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that Vinyl
they can be used with the floor mat Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
anchors. Do not put additional floor cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
mats on top of an anchored mat. cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Appearance Care 291

06/10/30 17:21:48 32SJD620_295
Interior Care
Leather Windows Seat Belts

(For some types) Clean the windows, inside and out,
Vacuum dirt and dust from the with a commercially-available glass
leather frequently. Pay particular cleaner. You can also use a mixture LOOP
attention to the pleats and seams. of one part white vinegar to ten parts
Clean the leather with a soft cloth water. This will remove the haze that
dampened with clear water, then builds up on the inside of the
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
further cleaning is needed, use a towels to clean all glass and clear
soap specifically for leather, such as plastic surfaces.
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and
buff as described above.
The rear window demister wire is
If you use a leather cleaner, wipe it bonded to the inside of the glass. Clean dirty seat belts with a soft
off quickly with a soft and dry cloth. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can brush and a mixture of mild soap and
Never leave a cloth soaked with dislodge and break these wires. warm water. Do not use bleach, dye,
leather cleaner on any part of the When cleaning the rear window, use or cleaning solvents. They can
interior. If left for a long time, some gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side. weaken the belt material. Let the
leather cleaners may cause belts air dry before you use the
discolouration or cracking of interior vehicle.
trim or fabric.
292 Appearance Care

06/10/30 17:21:57 32SJD620_296
Interior Care
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Dust and Pollen Filter The dust and pollen filter should be
belt anchors can cause the belts to (For some types) replaced at short intervals if you
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of This filter removes the dust and drive primarily in urban areas that
the loops with a clean cloth pollen that is brought in from the have high concentrations of soot in
dampened in mild soap and warm outside through the climate control the air from industry and diesel-
water or isopropyl alcohol. system. powered vehicles. Replace it more
often if airflow from the heating and
Air Fresheners This filter should be replaced during cooling system becomes less than
If you want to use an air freshener/ scheduled maintenance. See the usual.
deodorizer in the interior of your maintenance schedules in this
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type. owners manual.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of On EU models, refer to the
the interior trim and fabric to crack maintenance schedule in the Service
or discolour. Book that came with your vehicle.
If you use a liquid air freshener, On New Zealand model, refer to the
make sure you fasten it securely so it maintenance schedule in the Service
does not spill as you drive. Maintenance and Warranty Book
that came with your vehicle.
Appearance Care 293

06/10/30 17:22:05 32SJD620_297
Corrosion Protection
Two factors normally contribute to Many corrosion-preventive measures Use a high-pressure spray to clean
causing corrosion in your vehicle: are built into your vehicle. You can the underside of your vehicle. This
help keep your vehicle from is especially important in areas
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities. corroding by performing some that use road salt in winter. It is
Dirt and road salt that collects in simple periodic maintenance: also a good idea in humid climates
hollows on the underside of the and areas subject to salty air.
vehicle stays damp, promoting Repair chips and scratches in the Vehicles equipped with ABS have
corrosion in that area. paint as soon as you discover them. a sensor and wiring at each wheel.
Be careful not to damage them.
2. Removal of paint and protective Inspect and clean out the drain
coatings from the exterior and holes in the bottom of the doors Have the corrosion-preventive
underside of the vehicle. and body. coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
Check the floor coverings for periodically.
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
294 Appearance Care

06/10/30 17:22:09 32SJD620_298
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tyre...................... 296

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 297
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Wont Start .............. 303
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 305
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats
to do to correct it. If the problem has Petrol models ............................. 308
stranded you on the side of the road, Diesel models ............................. 310
you may be able to get going again. Low Oil Pressure Indicator
If not, you will also find instructions (Red) ........................................... 312
on getting your vehicle towed. Oil Level Indicator (Amber)......... 313
Charging System Indicator........... 314
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Petrol models ............................. 314
Diesel models ............................. 315
Glow Plugs Indicator ..................... 316
Brake System Indicator ................ 317
Fuses ............................................... 318
Fuse Locations
Petrol models ............................. 321
Diesel models ............................. 323
Emergency Towing ....................... 325
Taking Care of the Unexpected 295

06/10/30 17:22:18 32SJD620_299
Compact Spare Tyre
Use the compact spare tyre as a Do not use your compact spare INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get tyre on another vehicle unless it is
your regular tyre repaired or the same make and model.
replaced, and put it back on your
vehicle as soon as you can. Do not use more than one
compact spare tyre at the same
Check the compact spare tyre time.
inflation pressure every time you
check the other tyres. It should be Do not use the compact spare tyre
inflated to: if you are towing a trailer.
420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions:
The compact spare tyre has a
Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). shorter tread life than a regular tyre.
Replace the tyre when you can see
This tyre gives a harsher ride and the tread wear indicator bars. The
less traction on some road replacement should be the same size
surfaces. Use greater caution and design tyre, mounted on the
while driving. same wheel. The spare tyre is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
Do not mount snow chains on the wheel, and the spare wheel is not
compact spare tyre. designed for mounting a regular tyre.
296 Taking Care of the Unexpected

06/10/30 17:22:25 32SJD620_300
Changing a Flat Tyre
If you have a flat tyre while driving, 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
stop in a safe place to change it. non-slippery ground. Put the
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder The vehicle can easily roll off transmission in Park (automatic)
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive the jack, seriously injuring or reverse (manual). Apply the
slowly along the shoulder until you anyone underneath. parking brake.
get to an exit or an area to stop that
is far away from the traffic lanes. Follow the directions for If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
changing a tyre exactly, and the trailer.
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by 2. Turn on the hazard warning
Use the jack that came with your the jack. indicators, and turn the ignition
vehicle. If you try to raise another switch to the LOCK (0) position.
vehicle with this jack or use another Have all the passengers get out of
jack to raise your vehicle, the vehicle the vehicle while you change the
or jack can be damaged. tyre.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:22:34 32SJD620_301
HOOK 6. Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tyre out of its well.
7. Place blocks in front and back of

STRAP
the wheel diagonally opposite the
tyre you are changing.
TOOL KIT
3. Open the tailgate. Raise the 5. Take the jack out of the luggage
luggage area floor by lifting up on area.
the strap.
To keep the luggage area floor out Turn the jacks end bracket
of the way, attach the hook to the anticlockwise to loosen it, then
tailgate sill. remove the jack.
4. Take the tool kit out of the spare

tyre well.

06/10/30 17:22:41 32SJD620_302
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH
8. Loosen the four wheel nuts 1/2 9. Place the jack under the jacking 10. Use the extension and the wheel
turn with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tyre you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the
change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tyre is off the
clockwise until the top of the jack ground.
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:22:48 32SJD620_303
WHEEL NUTS 12. Remove the flat tyre. Place the flat
tyre on the ground with the
outside surface facing up. You
could scratch the wheel if you put
it face down.
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER
11. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel 13. Before mounting the spare tyre,
cover (on some types). Handle the wipe any dirt off the mounting
wheel nuts carefully; they may be surface of the wheel and hub with
hot from driving. The wheel cover a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
cannot be removed without first carefully; it may be hot from
removing the wheel nuts. Do not driving.
attempt to forcibly pry the wheel
cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool.

06/10/30 17:22:56 32SJD620_304
14. Put on the spare tyre. Put the 15. Lower the vehicle to the ground, 16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack. the same crisscross pattern. Have
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at
pattern with the wheel nut wrench the nearest automotive service
until the wheel is firmly against facility.
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully. Tighten the wheel nuts to:
108 Nm (11 kgfm , 80 lbfft)
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:23:06 32SJD620_305
For normal tyre WING BOLT 22. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jacks end bracket clockwise to
lock it in place. Store the tool kit.
Replace the cover.
Loose items can fly around

the interior in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
CENTRE CAP For spare tyre SPACER CONE
Store the wheel, jack, and
17. On some types, remove the centre 18. Adjust the rear centre seat tools securely before driving.
cap before storing the flat tyre in forward as far as it will possibly go.
the spare tyre well.
19. Place the flat tyre face down in the Store the wheel cover or centre
spare tyre well. cap in the luggage area. Make
sure it will not get scratched or
20. Remove the spacer cone from the damaged.
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt. 23. Close the tailgate.
21. Secure the flat tyre by screwing

the wing bolt back into its hole.

06/10/30 17:23:14 32SJD620_306
If the Engine Wont Start
Diagnosing why the engine wont Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
You hear nothing, or almost clicking sound, a series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
nothing. The engines starter nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things: need a qualified technician to
operates very slowly. determine the problem. See
Check the transmission interlock. Emergency Towing on page 325 .
You can hear the starter motor On some manual transmission
operating normally, or the starter models, the clutch pedal must be If the headlights dim noticeably or
motor sounds like it is spinning pushed all the way to the floor or go out when you try to start the
faster than normal, but the engine the starter will not operate. With engine, either the battery is
does not start up and run. an automatic transmission, it must discharged or the connections are
be in Park or neutral. corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (see page 318 ). You can then try
(II) position. Turn on the jump starting the vehicle from a
headlights, and check their booster battery (see page 305 ).
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 305 .

06/10/30 17:23:25 32SJD620_307
If the Engine Wont Start
The Starter Operates Normally There may be an electrical On diesel models

In this case, the starter motors problem, such as no power to the After you parked the vehicle for
speed sounds normal, or even faster fuel pump. Check all the fuses an extended period or when the
than normal, when you turn the (see page 318 ). outside temperature becomes very
ignition switch to the START (III) high, water stays in the fuel
position, but the engine does not run. On vehicles with a fuel cutoff system and the engine will not
system, the fuel cutoff switch may start. In this case, you should drain
Are you using the proper starting be activated. If the switch is the water from the fuel filter (see
procedure? Refer to Starting the activated, it must be reset before page 255 ).
Engine on page 202 on petrol starting the engine (see page 191 ).
models and page 203 on diesel If you find nothing wrong, you will
models. On diesel models need a qualified technician to find
If your vehicle runs out of fuel, the problem. See Emergency
Are you using a properly coded priming the fuel system is Towing on page 325 .
key? An improperly coded key will required to restart the engine (see
cause the immobilizer system page 284 ).
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 97 ). On diesel models
After you have stored your vehicle
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel for an extended period, air may
gauge; the low fuel indicator may have entered the fuel system (see
not be working. Priming the Fuel System on
page 284 ).

06/10/30 17:23:33 32SJD620_308
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

procedure, you should take several 1. Open the bonnet, and check the
precautions. A battery can explode if you physical condition of the battery.
do not follow the correct In very cold weather, check the
procedure, seriously injuring condition of the electrolyte. If it
anyone nearby. seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
You cannot start your vehicle with an Attempting to jump start with a
automatic transmission by pushing frozen battery can cause it to rupture.
or pulling it.
2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc. Put the transmission in
neutral (manual) or Park
(automatic), and set the parking
brake.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:23:40 32SJD620_309
Jump Starting
Petrol models Diesel models Petrol models
The numbers in the illustrations 4. Connect the second jumper cable

show you the order to connect the to the negative () terminal on
jumper cables. the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
3. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this
positive () terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of
battery. Connect the other end to the engine.
the positive () terminal on the
booster battery.

06/10/30 17:23:46 32SJD620_310
Jump Starting
Diesel models 7. Once the vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper

cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

06/10/30 17:23:55 32SJD620_311
If the Engine Overheats (Petrol models)
The pointer of the vehicles 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the bonnet if does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should steam is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in neutral the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the bonnet. (manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
accessories, and turn on the such as a split radiator hose.
hazard warning indicators. Everything is still extremely hot,
Driving with the temperature gauge so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause 2. If you see steam and/or spray must be repaired before you
serious damage to your engine. coming from under the bonnet, continue driving (see Emergency
turn off the engine. Wait until you Towing on page 325 ).
see no more signs of steam or
spray, then open the bonnet.

06/10/30 17:24:02 32SJD620_312
If the Engine Overheats (Petrol models)
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 9. Start the engine, and set the
check the coolant level in the temperature control to maximum.
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant Removing the radiator cap Add coolant to the radiator up to
if the level is below the MIN mark. while the engine is hot can the base of the filler neck. If you
cause the coolant to spray do not have the proper coolant
7. If there was no coolant in the out, seriously scalding you. mixture available, you can add
reserve tank, you may need to add plain water. Remember to have
coolant to the radiator. Let the Always let the engine and the cooling system drained and
engine cool down until the pointer radiator cool down before refilled with the proper mixture as
reaches the middle of the removing the radiator cap. soon as you can.
temperature gauge, or lower,
before checking the radiator. 10.Put the radiator cap back on
8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
cloth, turn the radiator cap the temperature gauge. If it goes
anticlockwise, without pushing back to the red mark, the engine
down, to the first stop. After the needs repair (see Emergency
pressure releases, push down on Towing on page 325 ).
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off. 11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

06/10/30 17:24:09 32SJD620_313
If Your Engine Overheats (Diesel models)
The pointer of the vehicles 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the bonnet if does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should steam is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in neutral, the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the bonnet. and set the parking brake. Turn
off the all accessories, and turn on
the hazard warning indicators.
Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the bonnet,
serious damage to your engine. turn off the engine. Wait until you
see no more signs of steam or
spray, then open the bonnet.

06/10/30 17:24:18 32SJD620_314
If Your Engine Overheats (Diesel models)
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, 9. Start the engine and set the
such as a split radiator hose. temperature control to maximum.
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the expansion Add coolant up to the MAX line on
so use caution. If you find a leak, it tank cap while the engine is the expansion tank. If you do not
must be repaired before you hot can cause the coolant to have the proper coolant mixture
continue driving (see Emergency spray out, seriously scalding available, you can add plain water.
Towing on page 325 ). you. Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
6. If you dont find an obvious leak, Always let the engine and the proper mixture as soon as you
check the coolant level in the radiator cool down before can.
expansion tank (see page 190 ). removing the expansion tank
cap. 10. Put the expansion tank cap back
7. If the expansion tank needs on tightly. Run the engine, and
coolant, you will have to add check the temperature gauge. If it
coolant. Before doing that, turn 8. Use gloves or a large heavy cloth goes back to the red mark, the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) while removing the expansion engine needs repair (see
position and check the tank cap. Loosen the cap by Emergency Towing on page 325 ).
temperature gauge. Remove the turning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise.
expansion tank cap only if the Stop and wait for any pressure in 11. If the temperature stays normal,
temperature gauge pointer has the expansion tank to escape. check the coolant level in the
come down to normal or below the Then remove the cap by turning it expansion tank. If it has gone
red mark and you do not hear any anticlockwise. down, add coolant to the MAX
bubbling or gurgling noise coming mark. Put the expansion tank cap
from the cooling system. back on tightly.

06/10/30 17:24:25 32SJD620_315
Low Oil Pressure Indicator (Red)
This indicator should come 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. The same design indicator may
on briefly in amber, then Open the bonnet, and check the oil come on amber while you are driving.
red when the ignition switch is in the level (see page 188 ). An engine This indicates that the engine oil
ON (II) position, and go out after the very low on oil can lose pressure level becomes low and reminds you
engine starts. during cornering and other driving to check the engine oil level (see
It should never come on red when manoeuvres. page 188 ). If it blinks in amber while
the engine is running. If it turns on you are driving, there is a system
red and starts flashing or stays on, 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the problem in the engine oil level
the oil pressure has dropped very level back to the full mark on the sensor.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine dipstick (see page 239 on petrol
damage is possible and you should models, and page 241 on diesel
take immediate action. models).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil

pressure indicator. If it does not go
Running the engine with low oil out within 10 seconds, turn off the
pressure can cause serious engine. There is a mechanical
mechanical damage almost problem that needs to be repaired
immediately. Turn off the engine as before you can continue driving
soon as you can safely get the (see Emergency Towing on page
vehicle stopped. 325 ).
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut

off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.

06/10/30 17:24:34 32SJD620_316
Oil Level Indicator (Amber)
This indicator should come If you do not carry spare engine oil in
on briefly in amber, then your vehicle, drive moderately to the
red when the ignition switch is in the nearest service area and add engine If you ignore the oil level indicator
ON (II) position, and go out after the oil. Avoid full-throttle acceleration and keep driving with this indicator
engine starts. and driving at high speed. on, you can seriously damage the
If this indicator comes on amber engine.
when the engine is running, the The oil level indicator can be reset
engine oil level is low. Safely pull off each time you turn off the engine. If the amber indicator blinks while
the road, park the vehicle on level When you start your trip again, the driving, there is a system problem in
ground, turn off the engine and let system begins to monitor the engine the engine oil level sensor. Have
the vehicle sit for approximately 3 oil level. It may take a while until the your dealer inspect your vehicle as
minutes. system senses the engine oil level is soon as possible.
low and the indicator comes on
Check the oil level (see page 188 ). If amber. You should check the engine This system activates after the
the engine oil level is near or below oil level and add engine oil before engine warms up. If the outside
the lower mark on the dipstick, you driving again if the oil level indicator temperature is extremely low, you
should add the engine oil (see page comes on. may have to drive for a long time
239 on petrol models, and page until the system senses the engine
241 on diesel models). oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark on

the dipstick and do not spill the
engine oil in the engine compartment.
This could damage the engine and
other components.

06/10/30 17:24:42 32SJD620_317
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Petrol models)
Charging System Malfunction Indicator You should also have the dealer
Indicator Lamp inspect your vehicle if the indicator
This indicator should come on when (Petrol models) comes on frequently, even though it
the ignition switch is in the ON (II) This indicator comes on, then goes goes off when you follow the above
position, and go out after the engine out when you turn the ignition procedure.
starts. If the charging system switch to the ON (II) position. If the
indicator comes on brightly when the indicator comes on while driving, it
engine is running, the battery is not means one of the engines emissions
being charged. control systems may have a problem. If you keep driving with the
Even though you may feel no malfunction indicator lamp on, you
Immediately turn off all electrical difference in your vehicles can damage your vehicles emissions
accessories. Try not to use other performance, it can reduce your fuel controls and engine. Those repairs
electrically operated controls such as economy and cause increased may not be covered by your vehicles
the power windows. Keep the engine emissions. Continued operation may warranties.
running; starting the engine will cause serious damage.
discharge the battery rapidly. If you turn the ignition switch to the
If this indicator comes on, safely pull ON (II) position, without starting the
Go to a dealer or a service station off the road and turn off the engine. engine, the malfunction indicator
where you can get technical Restart the engine and watch the lamp will come on for about 20
assistance. indicator. If it stays on, have your seconds. It then goes off or blinks 5
vehicle checked by the dealer as times under various conditions. This
soon as possible. Drive moderately is normal: it shows the self-testing
until the dealer has inspected the condition of the diagnostics for the
problem. Avoid full-throttle emissions control systems.
acceleration and driving at high
speed.

06/10/30 17:24:50 32SJD620_318
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Diesel models)
This indicator comes on, You should also have the dealer This indicator will also come on and
then goes out when you inspect your vehicle if the indicator you cannot restart the engine after
turn the ignition switch to the ON comes on frequently, even though it your vehicle has run out of fuel. If
(II) position. If it comes on at any goes off when you follow the above this occurs, refuel the fuel tank, then
other time, it indicates one of the procedure. follow the procedure for Priming
emissions control systems may have the Fuel System on page 284 before
a problem. Even though you may attempting to restart the engine.
feel no difference in your vehicles
performance, it can reduce your fuel If you keep driving with the If you turn the ignition switch to the
economy and cause your vehicle to malfunction indicator lamp on, you ON (II) position, without starting the
put out excessive emissions. can damage your vehicles emissions engine, the malfunction indicator
Continued operation may cause controls and engine. Those repairs lamp will come on for about 20
serious damage. may not be covered by your vehicles seconds. It then goes off or blinks 5
warranties. times under various conditions. This
If this indicator comes on, safely pull is normal: it shows the self-testing
off the road and turn off the engine. The indicator may come on along condition of the diagnostics for the
Restart and turn off the engine at with the glow plugs indicator if the emissions control systems.
least three times at intervals of emissions control systems have
approximately 30 seconds, then several problems.
watch the indicator. If it stays on,
have your vehicle checked by your
dealer as soon as possible. Drive
moderately until the dealer has
inspected the problem. Avoid full-
throttle acceleration and driving at
high speed.

06/10/30 17:24:57 32SJD620_319
Glow Plugs Indicator (Diesel models)
This indicator comes on for You should also have the dealer This indicator may blink along with
a few seconds (several inspect your vehicle if the indicator malfunction indicator lamp if the
seconds in cold weather or at high blinks frequently, even though it emissions control systems have
altitudes) when you turn the ignition goes off when you follow the above several problems.
switch to the ON (II) position. If it procedure.
blinks while the engine is running, This indicator will also blink and you
there is a problem in the engine cannot restart the engine after your
control system. Continued operation vehicle has run out of fuel. If this
may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the glow occurs, refuel the fuel tank, then
plugs indicator blinking, you can follow the procedure for Priming
If this indicator blinks, safely pull off damage your vehicles emissions the Fuel System on page 284 before
the road and turn off the engine. controls and engine. Those repairs attempting to restart the engine.
Restart and turn off the engine at may not be covered by your vehicles
least three times at intervals of warranties. This indicator may also blink if you
approximately 30 seconds, then do not use the proper fuel for the
watch the indicator. If it starts to climate or regional condition. This
blink again, have your vehicle may cause the engine power to
checked by your dealer as soon as reduce (see page 184 ).
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.

06/10/30 17:25:04 32SJD620_320
Brake System Indicator
The brake system indicator However, if the brake pedal does not If you must drive the vehicle a short
normally comes on when feel normal, you should take distance in this condition, drive
you turn the ignition switch to the immediate action. A problem in one slowly and carefully.
ON (II) position, and as a reminder part of the systems dual circuit
to check the parking brake. It will design will still give you braking at If the ABS indicator comes on with
stay on if you do not fully release the two wheels. You will feel the brake the brake system indicator, have
parking brake. pedal go down much farther before your vehicle inspected by your
the vehicle begins to slow down, and dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator comes you will have to press harder on the
on while driving, the brake fluid level pedal.
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. Slow down by shifting to a lower
If it does, check the brake fluid level gear, and pull to the side of the road
the next time you stop at a service when it is safe. Because of the long
station (see page 250 ). distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
If the fluid level is low, take your should have it towed and repaired as
vehicle to a dealer, and have the soon as possible (see Emergency
brake system inspected for leaks or Towing on page 325 ).
worn brake pads.

06/10/30 17:25:13 32SJD620_321
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-BONNET Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
TAB you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
321 and 322 on petrol models, and
pages 323 and 324 on diesel models,
or the diagram on the fuse box lid,
which fuse or fuses control that
device. Check those fuses first, but
check all the fuses before deciding
Petrol models that a blown fuse is the cause.
Replace any blown fuses, and check
The vehicles fuses are contained in UNDER-BONNET if the device works.
two fuse boxes. TAB
The interior fuse box is under the

dashboard on the drivers side.
The under-bonnet fuse box is located

on the left or right side of the engine
compartment. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
Diesel models

06/10/30 17:25:22 32SJD620_322
Fuses
FUSE BLOWN FUSE BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-bonnet fuse box by under-bonnet fuse box and all the
headlights and all other looking through the side window fuses in the interior fuse box by
accessories are off. at the wire inside. Remove the pulling out each one with the fuse
screws with a Phillips-head puller provided in the under-
2. Remove the cover from the fuse screwdriver. bonnet fuse box.
box.
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:25:28 32SJD620_323
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle

without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a fuse with one that has a
of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the
from one of the other circuits with chances of damaging the electrical
the fuse puller provided in the under- system. If you do not have a
bonnet fuse box. Make sure you can replacement fuse with the proper
do without that circuit temporarily rating for the circuit, install one with
(such as the cigarette lighter or a lower rating.
radio).
BLOWN 6. If the replacement fuse of the
If you replace the blown fuse with a same rating blows in a short time,
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it there is probably a serious
5. Look for a burned wire inside the might blow out again. This does not electrical problem with your
fuse. If it is burned out, replace it indicate anything wrong. Replace the vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
with one of the spare fuses of the fuse with one of the correct rating as that circuit, and have your vehicle
same rating or lower. soon as you can. checked by a qualified technician.

06/10/30 17:25:36 32SJD620_324
Fuse Locations (Petrol models)
UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box vary
slightly depending on models. On some models, the
locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse
label. Refer to the table below for the fuses on your
vehicle.
No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected
1 Battery 15 LAF Sensor

Not Used 16 Hazard
2 Ignition Switch 17 Daytime Running Light
Option 18 Not Used
3 ABS P 19 Oil Level Sensor
FUSE BOX LABEL (On some types) VSA P 20 Stop Switch
4 ABS V 21 Left Headlight
VSA V 22 Right Headlight
5 Headlight Washer 23 Back Up
6 Not Used 24 Interior Light
7 Not Used 25 Not Used
8 Rear Demister 26 Super Lock
9 Radiator Fan 27 Sunroof
10 Condenser Fan 28 Front Demister
11 Heater Motor 29 MG Clutch
12 Not Used 30 Front Fog Lights
13 Ignition Coil 31 FR Wiper AS
14 Horn, Stop
: For some types

06/10/30 17:25:43 32SJD620_325
Fuse Locations (Petrol models)
INTERIOR FUSE BOX The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightly
depending on models. The locations of fuses are shown
with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table below
for the fuses on your vehicle.
1 Ignition Coil 17 Lighting

2 SRS 18 IG HAC
3 ABS 19 Passengers Power Window
4 Not Used 20 Rear Left Power Window
5 Front Wipers 21 Rear Right Power Window
FUSE BOX LABEL 6 Back Light 22 Door Locks
7 Fuel Pump 23 Drivers Power Window
8 ACG (IG) 24 Audio
9 Meter 25 DBW
10 Heated Seat 26 Small Light
11 Rear Fog Light 27 ACC Cigarette Lighter
12 IGP 28 ACC
13 Not Used
14 Rear Wiper
: For some types
15 SRS
16 Mirror

06/10/30 17:25:52 32SJD620_326
Fuse Locations (Diesel models)
UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box vary
slightly depending on models. On some models, the
locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse
label. Refer to the table below for the fuses on your
vehicle.
1 Battery 15 Sunroof
Glow Plug 16 Hazard
2 Ignition Switch 17 Daytime Running Light
Option 18 Fuel Heater Monitor
3 ABS P 19 Fuel Heater
FUSE BOX LABEL VSA P 20 Stop Switch
4 ABS V 21 Left Headlight
VSA V 22 Right Headlight
5 PTC HTR1 23 Back Up
6 PTC HTR2 24 Interior Light
7 PTC HTR3 25 PGM-FI (ECM) Main
8 Rear Demister 26 Super Lock
9 Radiator Fan 27 Intake Shutter Valve
10 Condenser Fan 28 PGM-FI (ECM) Sub
11 Heater Motor 29 MG Clutch
12 Fuel Heater 30 Front Fog Lights
13 Headlight Washer 31 FR Wiper AS
14 Horn, Stop
: For some types

06/10/30 17:26:00 32SJD620_327
Fuse Locations (Diesel models)
INTERIOR FUSE BOX The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightly
depending on models. The locations of fuses are shown
with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table below
for the fuses on your vehicle.
1 Back Light 17 Lighting

2 SRS 18 IG HAC
3 ABS 19 Passengers Power Window
4 Not Used 20 Left Rear Power Window
5 Front Wiper 21 Right Rear Power Window
FUSE BOX LABEL 6 Not Used 22 Door Locks
7 PGM-FI (ECM) 23 Drivers Power Window
8 ACG 24 Audio
9 Meter 25 Heated Mirror
10 Heated Seat 26 Small Light
11 Rear Fog Light 27 ACC Cigarette Lighter
12 IGP 28 ACC
13 Not Used
14 Rear Wiper
: For some types
15 SRS
16 Mirror

06/10/30 17:26:13 32SJD620_328
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, Sling-type Equipment The tow

call a professional towing service or truck uses metal cables with hooks
an organization. Never tow your on the ends. These hooks go around Improper towing preparation will
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is parts of the frame or suspension and damage the transmission. Follow the
very dangerous. the cables lift that end of the vehicle above procedure exactly. If you
off the ground. Your vehicles cannot shift the transmission or start
There are three popular types of suspension and body can be the engine, your vehicle must be
professional towing equipment. seriously damaged. This method of transported with the front wheels off
towing is unacceptable. the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a If, due to damage, your vehicle must With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to be towed with the front wheels on it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
transport your vehicle. the ground, do this: than 80 km (50 miles), and keep the
speed below 55 km/h (35 mph).
Wheel-lift Equipment The tow On vehicles with manual transmission
truck uses two pivoting arms that go Release the parking brake. If your vehicle is equipped with a
under the front tyres and lift them Shift the transmission to neutral. front spoiler, remove it before
off the ground. The other two rear towing so it is not damaged.
tyres remain on the ground. This is On vehicles with automatic transmission
an acceptable way to tow your Release the parking brake.
vehicle. Start the engine.
Shift to D, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock. CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:26:17 32SJD620_329
Emergency Towing
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by

the bumpers will cause serious
damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicles
weight.
The steering system can be

damaged if the steering wheel is
locked. Leave the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.

06/10/30 17:26:21 32SJD620_330
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 328

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 330
your vehicle, and the locations of the Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 336
identification numbers. Catalytic Converters...................... 337
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
System..................................... 338
Technical Information 327

06/10/30 17:26:29 32SJD620_331
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying Petrol models

numbers located in various places.
ENGINE NUMBER
1. The chassis number is stamped on
the fire wall.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
2. The engine number is stamped
into the engine block. MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
3. The transmission number is on a CHASSIS NUMBER/ENGINE NUMBER/

label on top of the transmission. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Do not mistake the transmission

number for the engine number. Diesel models
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
CHASSIS NUMBER/ENGINE NUMBER/

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
328 Technical Information

06/10/30 17:26:34 32SJD620_332
Identification Numbers
On some types, the chassis number/

chassis and engine numbers also VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
appear on the plate attached to the NUMBER (VIN) (For some types)
left damper housing.
On some other types, a certification

plate is attached to the drivers
doorjamb.
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) appears on a plate attached to
the engine compartment bulkhead or
the left damper housing, and on a
plate fastened to the top of the
dashboard on some types.
CERTIFICATION PLATE
(For some types)
CERTIFICATION PLATE

06/10/30 17:26:48 32SJD620_333
Specifications
Dimensions The mounting point/rear over

Length 4,285 mm (168.7 in) hang of coupling device No. Dimensions
Width 1,810 mm (71.3 in) (1) (1) 556 mm (21.9 in)
1,795 mm (70.7 in)1 (2) (2) 555 mm (21.9 in)
Height 1,610 mm (63.4 in)2 (3) (3) 528 mm (20.8 in)
1,625 mm (64.0 in)3 (4) (4) 391 mm (15.4 in)
Wheelbase 2,685 mm (105.7 in) (5) (5) 295 mm (11.6 in)
Track Front 1,555 mm (61.2 in) (6) 1,148 mm (45.2 in)
Rear 1,575 mm (62.0 in) (7) 1,035 mm (40.7 in)
(8) 854 mm (33.6 in)
1 : Bermuda models
2 : Without roof rail
3 : With roof rail (7) (6)
(8)
NOTE:
1. marks show towbar fixing points.
2. mark shows towbar coupling point.

06/10/30 17:27:01 32SJD620_334
Specifications
Weights
Curb weight 1,4231,483 kg (3,1373,269 lbs)1 Max. towing weight
1,4491,510 kg (3,1943,329 lbs)2 (EU)1,2 Trailer with brakes 1,500 kg (3,307 lbs)
1,5731,632 kg (3,4683,598 lbs)3 Trailer without 500 kg (1,102 lbs)
Max. permissible weight 1,975 kg (4,354 lbs)1 brakes
2,020 kg (4,453 lbs)2 The maximum permissible
2,130 kg (4,696 lbs)3 vertical load on the coupling 90 kg (198 lbs)
Max. permissible Front 1,010 kg (2,227 lbs)1 device
axle weight 1,030 kg (2,271 lbs)2
1,145 kg (2,524 lbs)3 1 : The following is for Germany only.
Rear 990 kg (2,183 lbs)1 The maximum trailer weight is valid for 12 % slope. For an
1,000 kg (2,205 lbs)2 increasing of the trailer weight you have to look in your vehicle
985 kg (2,172 lbs)3 paper or ask your next dealer.
2 : The maximum towing weight should be reduced if you tow a
1 : Petrol models (MT) trailer over 1,000 meters of elevation. For more information, see
2 : Petrol models (AT) page 222 .
3 : Diesel models
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:27:08 32SJD620_335
Specifications
Engine (Petrol models) Engine (Diesel models)

Type Water cooled 4-stroke Type Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
SOHC VTEC in line, 4-cylinder TURBO in line, 4-cylinder
gasoline engine diesel engine
Bore x Stroke 81 x 87.3 mm (3.19 x 3.44 in) Bore x Stroke 85.0 x 97.1 mm (3.35 x 3.82 in)
Displacement 1,799 cm (110 cu-in) Displacement 2,204 cm (134 cu-in)
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 Compression ratio 16.7 : 1
Spark Plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11S
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11S

06/10/30 17:27:22 32SJD620_336
Specifications
Capacities
Fuel tank Approx. Engine Oil (Petrol models)
58 (15.3 US gal , 12.8 Imp gal) Change5
Engine coolant (Petrol models) Including filter 3.7 (3.9 US qt , 3.3 Imp qt)
Right-hand drive type Without filter 3.5 (3.7 US qt , 3.1 Imp qt)
Change1 AT 4.9 (1.29 US gal , 1.08 Imp gal) Total 4.5 (4.8 US qt , 4.0 Imp qt)
MT 4.9 (1.29 US gal , 1.08 Imp gal) Engine Oil (Diesel models)
Total AT 6.1 (1.61 US gal , 1.34 Imp gal) Change5
MT 6.2 (1.64 US gal , 1.36 Imp gal) Including filter 5.9 (6.2 US qt , 5.2 Imp qt)
Left-hand drive type Without filter 5.5 (5.8 US qt , 4.8 Imp qt)
Change1 AT 4.8 (1.27 US gal , 1.06 Imp gal) Total 6.5 (6.9 US qt , 5.7 Imp qt)
MT 4.9 (1.29 US gal , 1.08 Imp gal)
Total AT 6.1 (1.61 US gal , 1.34 Imp gal) 5 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
MT 6.2 (1.64 US gal , 1.36 Imp gal)
Engine coolant (Diesel models)
Change2 6.3 (1.66 US gal , 1.39 Imp gal)3
6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal)4
Total 8.0 (2.11 US gal , 1.76 Imp gal)
1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in

the engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.6 (0.16 US gal , 0.13 Imp gal)
Heater capacity: 0.55 (0.145 US gal , 0.121 Imp gal)
2 : Including the coolant in the heater and the expansion tank and that
remaining in the engine.
Expansion tank capacity: 0.8 (0.21 US gal , 0.18 Imp gal)
Heater capacity: 0.7 (0.18 US gal , 0.15 Imp gal)
3 : Without removing the drain bolt on the engine
4 : With removing the drain bolt on the engine
CONTINUED

06/10/30 17:27:33 32SJD620_337
Specifications
Capacities Tyres
Manual transmission Size/Pressure See tyre information label on
fluid Change 2.1 (2.2 US qt , 1.8 Imp qt)1 drivers doorjamb or ask dealer
2.2 (2.3 US qt , 1.9 Imp qt)2 for information.
Total 2.3 (2.4 US qt , 2.0 Imp qt)1
2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)2 Alignment
Automatic transmission Toe-in Front 0.0 mm (0.00 in)
fluid Change 2.6 (2.7 US qt , 2.3 Imp qt) Rear in 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Total 7.0 (7.4 US qt , 6.2 Imp qt) Camber Front 0
Windscreen 4.5 (4.8 US qt , 4.0 Imp qt)3 Rear 1
washer reservoir 5.8 (6.1 US qt , 5.1 Imp qt)4 Caster Front 347
1 : Petrol models
2 : Diesel models
3 : Without headlight washer
4 : With headlight washer

06/10/30 17:27:59 32SJD620_338
Specifications
Suspension Lights
Type Front Strut Headlights High 12 V 60 W (H4)
Rear Double wishbone Low 12 V 55 W (HB2)
High/Low 12 V 35 W 1
Steering Front turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
Type Rack and pinion, with hydraulic power Front position lights 12 V 5W
assistance Rear turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
Stop/tail-lights 12 V 21/5 W
Clutch Back-up lights 12 V 21 W
Type Dry, single plate, diaphragm spring Rear fog light2 12 V 21 W
Licence plate lights 12 V 5W
Brake High-mount brake light 12 V 18 W
Type Power assisted Spotlights 12 V 8W
Front Ventilated disc Ceiling lights Front 12 V 8W
Rear Solid disc Rear 12 V 8W
Parking Mechanical Front fog lights2 12 V 55 W
Battery 1 : On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights,

Capacity Petrol models 12 V 45 AH/20 HR replacement of a headlight bulb should be performed by your
Diesel models 12 V 74 AH/20 HR dealer.
2 : For some types
Fuses
Interior See page 322 on petrol models
and page 324 on diesel models, or
the fuse label attached to the
inside of the fuse box door under
the steering column.
Under-bonnet See page 321 on petrol models
and page 323 on diesel models, or
the fuse box cover.

06/10/30 17:28:07 32SJD620_339
Three Way Catalytic Converter (Petrol models)
The three way catalytic converter Keep the engine well maintained.
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical Have your vehicle diagnosed and
reactions to convert the exhaust repaired if it is misfiring,
gasses without affecting the metals. backfiring, stalling, or otherwise
The catalytic converter is referred to not running properly.
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take Always use unleaded petrol. Even
place. It can set on fire any a small amount of leaded petrol
combustible materials that come can contaminate the catalyst
near it. Park your vehicle away from metals, making the three way
high grass, dry leaves, or other catalytic converter ineffective.
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic

converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engines
performance. Follow these
guidelines to protect your vehicles
three way catalytic converter.

06/10/30 17:28:12 32SJD620_340
Catalytic Converters (Diesel models)
The catalytic converter contains

precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are
equipped with your vehicle to reduce
HC, CO, NOx, and PM. A
replacement unit must be an original
Honda part or its equivalent.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Always use only diesel fuel

recommended in this owners
manual (see page 184 ).

06/10/30 17:28:19 32SJD620_341
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) The DPF system requires no regular

System maintenance. If you drive for long
(For some types) periods at slow speeds, particulate
matter (PM) will be accumulated
and the regeneration of DPF will be
required. The condition of the
accumulated PM will vary with the
type of diesel fuel. Always use the
recommended diesel fuel in this
owners manual (see page 184 ).
CATALYTIC CONVERTER with DPF CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Your vehicle is equipped with the The PM will be burnt out and
diesel particulate filter (DPF) system removed from the DPF at a
to remove the particulate matter periodically high temperature of the
(PM) from the exhaust gas in catalytic converter. While the PM is
normal high speed driving. The DPF burnt, you may notice some white
is installed in the catalytic converter. smoke in the exhaust gas.

06/10/30 17:28:24 32SJD620_342
Diesel Particulate Filter If you ignore the indicator blinking,

(DPF) Indicator it stops blinking, then stays on. If
If this indicator blinks while the this happens, take your vehicle to a
engine is running, the diesel Honda dealer as soon as possible to
particulate filter (DPF) should be have the DPF system checked. If
regenerated to remove the you ignore this indicator and
accumulated particulate matter (PM). continue driving, the DPF and your
vehicles emission control systems
To regenerate the DPF, when traffic will be seriously damaged.
allows, maintain a vehicle speed of at
least 60 km/h (37 mph) and continue The catalytic converter and DPF
to drive until the indicator goes out system must operate at a high
(it may take about 15 minutes). This temperature for the chemical
will increase the exhaust reactions to take place. It can set on
temperature and help to burn and fire any combustible materials that
remove the PM from the DPF. come near it. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.

06/10/30 17:28:26 32SJD620_343
340
06/10/30 17:28:31 32SJD620_344
Index
A Average Fuel Mileage ..................... 84 Booster Seat ..................................... 61

Audio System ................................. 148 Brakes
Accessories and Modifications .... 193 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 215
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Automatic Speed Control.............. 179 Break-in, New Linings .............. 184
Position) ........................................ 98 Automatic Transmission............... 207 Bulb Replacement ..................... 263
Accessory Power Socket .............. 135 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 334 Fluid ............................................ 250
Adding Engine Coolant ......... 243, 246 Checking Fluid Level ................ 249 Parking................................ 128, 129
Additives, Engine Oil ............ 240, 242 D3 Mode ..................................... 209 System Indicator .................. 75, 317
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 12, 26 Position Indicators ..................... 207 Wear Indicators ......................... 214
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 253 Shifting ........................................ 207 Braking System.............................. 214
Air Conditioning System ............... 140 Shift Lock Release............. 211, 212 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 184
Maintenance ............................... 270 Automatic Wipers ............................ 88 Brightness Control,
Usage .................................. 146, 147 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 176 Instruments .................................. 93
Air Outlets(Vents) ......................... 140 Brights, Headlights ......................... 90
Air Pressure, Tyres ....................... 274 B
Aluminium Wheels, Cleaning ...... 290
Antifreeze ............................... 243, 246 Battery
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Charging System
Indicator ................................ 76, 215 Indicator............................ 74, 314
Operation .................................... 215 Jump Starting ............................. 305
Anti-theft Steering Column Maintenance ............................... 281
Lock ............................................... 98 Specifications ............................. 335
Appearance Care ........................... 287 Before Driving ............................... 183
Aquaplaning.................................... 220 Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
Armrest ........................................... 111 Beverage Holders .......................... 132
Ashtray ............................................ 135 Bonnet, Opening the ..................... 186 CONTINUED
341
06/10/30 17:28:35 32SJD620_345
Index
Bulb Replacement CD Player........................................ 161 Tethers.......................................... 57

Back-up Lights ........................... 263 CD Player Error Messages .......... 172 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33
Brake Lights............................... 263 Ceiling Lights ................................. 136 Childproof Door Locks ................. 101
Front Fog Lights........................ 266 Centre Pocket ................................ 133 Cigarette Lighter ........................... 134
Front Position Lights ................ 262 Certification Plate .......................... 329 Cleaner Element, Air ..................... 253
Headlights .................................. 258 Chains, Tyres ................................. 279 Cleaning
High-mount Brake Light .......... 264 Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 297 Aluminium Wheels .................... 290
Interior Lights ............................ 268 Changing Oil Carpeting .................................... 291
Licence Plate Lights .................. 265 When to....................................... 229 Exterior ....................................... 288
Rear Fog Light ........................... 263 Charging System Indicator .... 74, 314 Fabric .......................................... 291
Rear Lights ................................. 263 Chassis Number ............................ 328 Interior ........................................ 291
Specifications ............................. 335 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 201 Leather ........................................ 292
Spotlights .................................... 268 Child Restraint Systems ................. 43 Seat Belts .................................... 292
Turn Signal Lights............. 260, 263 Lower Anchorages ...................... 47 Vinyl ............................................ 291
Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 258, 266 Tether Anchor Points ................. 57 Windows ..................................... 292
Child Restraint Systems for EU ..... 46 Climate Control System ................ 140
C Child Safety ...................................... 32 Clock ............................................... 174
Booster Seats ............................... 61 Clutch Fluid .................................... 250
Capacities Chart .................... 333, 334 Child Restraint Systems ............. 43 Coat Hooks ..................................... 134
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 65 Important Safety Cold Weather, Starting in ..... 202, 203
Carrying Luggage .......................... 195 Reminders ................................ 32 Compact Spare Tyre...................... 296
Catalytic Converters...................... 337 Infants ........................................... 39 Controls, Instruments and .............. 69
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii Larger Children ........................... 60
CD Care .......................................... 171 Lower Anchorages ...................... 47
CD Changer.................................... 166 Risks with Airbags................. 33, 36
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 173 Small Children.............................. 41
342
06/10/30 17:28:40 32SJD620_346
Index
Coolant Dipstick Emergencies................................... 295

Adding................................. 243, 246 Automatic Transmission........... 249 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 305
Checking ..................................... 189 Engine Oil ................................... 188 Brake System Indicator ............ 317
Proper Solution .................. 243, 246 Directional Signals ........................... 90 Changing a Flat Tyre ................ 297
Temperature Gauge .................... 82 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 214 Charging System Indicator ...... 314
Corrosion Protection ..................... 294 Disc Player...................................... 161 Checking the Fuses................... 318
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 77 Doors Glow Plugs Indicator ................. 316
Cruise Control Operation ............. 179 Locking and Unlocking ............... 99 Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 94
Cup Holders.................................... 132 Power Door Locks ....................... 99 Jump Starting ............................. 305
Cushion Tray .................................. 131 Super Locking ............................ 100 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 312
Downshifting Malfunction Indicator
D Automatic Transmission........... 207 Lamp ............................... 314, 315
Manual Transmission ............... 204 Oil Level Indicator .................... 313
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii Draining Water ................................ 80 Overheated Engine ........... 308, 310
Dashboard .......................... 2, 4, 70, 71 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Towing ........................................ 325
Daytime Running Lights................. 90 Drivers Pocket .............................. 132 Emergency Brake.................. 128, 129
Dead Battery .................................. 305 Driving ............................................ 199 Emergency Flashers ....................... 94
Defrosting the Windows ............... 146 Economy ..................................... 192 Emergency Towing ....................... 325
Demister, Rear Window ................. 94 Guidelines ................................... 200
Detachable Anchor........................ 117 In Bad Weather .......................... 219
Diesel Engine ................................. 332 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 293
Diesel Fuel ...................................... 184 D3 Mode ......................................... 209
Diesel Particulate Filter(DPF) ..... 338
Indicator ........................................ 80 E
Dimensions ..................................... 330
Dimming the Headlights ................ 90 Economy, Fuel ............................... 192 CONTINUED
343
06/10/30 17:28:45 32SJD620_347
Index
Engine Filters Economy ..................................... 192

Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 82 Air Cleaner ................................. 253 Fill Door and Cap....................... 185
Glow plugs Indicator ................... 79 Dust and Pollen .......................... 293 Filter ............................................ 255
If It Wont Start .......................... 303 Fuel .............................................. 255 Gauge ............................................ 83
Malfunction Indicator Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 94 Mileage ......................................... 84
Lamp ......................... 74, 314, 315 Flat Tyre, Changing a ................... 297 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 79
Oil Level Indicator ............... 74, 313 Floor Mats ...................................... 291 Octane Requirement ................. 184
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 74, 312 Fluids Tank, Refueling ......................... 185
Oil, What Kind to Use ....... 239, 241 Automatic Transmission........... 249 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 318
Overheating........................ 308, 310 Brake ........................................... 250
Specifications ............................. 332 Clutch .......................................... 250 G
Starting ............................... 202, 203 Manual Transmission ............... 249
Engine Coolant....................... 243, 246 Power Steering........................... 252 Gauges
Engine Number.............................. 328 Windscreen Washers ................ 248 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 82
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 65 Folding Door Mirrors.................... 127 Fuel ................................................ 83
Expansion Tank ..................... 190, 246 Folding Rear Seat .......................... 115 Speedometer ................................ 81
Expectant Mothers, Four-way Flashers ........................... 94 Tachometer .................................. 81
Use of Seat Belts by .................... 19 Front Airbags ............................. 12, 26 Gearshift Lever Positions
Exterior, Cleaning the ................... 288 Front Fog Lights .............................. 91 Automatic Transmission........... 207
Front Seat ....................................... 108 Manual Transmission ............... 204
F Adjusting..................................... 108 Glass Cleaning ............................... 292
Airbags .................................... 12, 26 Glove Box ....................................... 131
Fabric, Cleaning ............................. 291 Heaters........................................ 119 Glow Plugs Indicator ............... 79, 316
Fan, Interior.................................... 144 Fuel .................................................. 184
Features .......................................... 139 Cutoff System ............................ 191
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 185 Diesel .......................................... 184
344
06/10/30 17:28:49 32SJD620_348
Index
H I Rear Fog Light ............................. 77

Seat Belt Reminder...................... 75
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 258 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 328 Security System ........................... 78
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 94 Ignition SRS .......................................... 30, 75
Headlights Keys............................................... 96 Turn Signal and Hazard
Adjuster ...................................... 122 Switch ............................................ 98 Warning .................................... 77
Aiming ......................................... 258 Immobilizer System......................... 97 VSA Activation ............................. 78
Daytime Running Lights............. 90 Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 VSA System .................................. 78
High Beam Indicator ................... 76 Indicators .......................................... 74 Water In Diesel Filter ................. 80
Lights On Indicator ..................... 76 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 76 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 74
Low Beams, Turning on ............. 90 Brake (Parking and Brake Infant Restraint ................................ 39
Reminder Chime .......................... 90 System) ............................. 75, 317 Infant Seats ....................................... 39
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 258 Charging System ................. 74, 314 Lower Anchorages ...................... 47
Turning on .................................... 90 Cruise Control .............................. 77 Tether Anchor Points ................. 57
Washer .......................................... 87 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF).. 80 Inflation, Proper Tyre ................... 274
Head Restraints ............................. 110 Door-open ..................................... 77 Inside Mirror .................................. 126
Heated Mirror ................................ 127 Front Fog Light ........................... 77 Inspection, Tyre ............................. 275
Heater, Seat .................................... 119 Glow Plugs............................ 79, 316 Instrument Panel ....................... 72, 73
Heating and Air Conditioning High Beam.................................... 76 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 93
System......................................... 140 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 76 Interior Cleaning ............................ 291
High Altitude, Starting at ..... 202, 203 Lights On ...................................... 76 Interior Lights ................................ 136
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 90 Low Fuel ....................................... 79 Introduction ......................................... i
High-mount Brake Light............... 264 Low Oil Pressure ................. 74, 312
Horn .................................... 3, 5, 85, 86 Malfunction Indicator
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 252 Lamp ......................... 74, 314, 315
Oil Level (Amber) ............... 74, 313 CONTINUED
345
06/10/30 17:28:56 32SJD620_349
Index
J Glove Box ................................... 131 Manual Transmission.................... 204

Power Door .................................. 99 Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 249
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 299 Super Locking ............................ 100 Maximum Allowable Shift
Jack, Tyre ....................................... 298 Tailgate ....................................... 102 Speeds ................................. 205, 210
Jump Starting ................................. 305 Low Coolant Level ......................... 189 Meters, Gauges.......................... 72, 81
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 79 Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 126
K Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 74, 312 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 194
Lower Anchorages .......................... 47
Keys ................................................... 96 Lower Gear, Downshifting N
to a ............................................... 204
L Lubricant Specifications New Vehicle Break-in ................... 184
Chart .................................... 333-334 Normal Shift Speeds...................... 205
Label, Certification ........................ 329 Luggage, How to Carry................. 195 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 90 Luggage Hooks .............................. 198 Numbers, Identification ................ 328
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 17, 21 Luggage, Storing ........................... 195
Lights O
Bulb Replacement ..................... 256 M
Indicators ...................................... 74 Octane Requirement,
Position ......................................... 90 Maintenance ................................... 227 Petrol ........................................... 184
Turn Signal ................................... 90 Owners Maintenance Odometer .......................................... 83
Load Limit ...................................... 196 Checks .................................... 230 Odometer, Trip ................................ 83
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 98 Record ......................................... 236
Lockable Retractor .............. 52, 53, 55 Safety........................................... 228
Locks Schedule .............................. 229-235
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 98 Malfunction Indicator
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 185 Lamp ............................. 74, 314, 315
346
06/10/30 17:29:01 32SJD620_350
Index
Oil Filter ............................................ 255 Using Lower Anchorages ........... 47

Change, When to ....................... 229 Fuel Cutoff System.................... 191
Checking Engine ....................... 188 Fuel Economy ............................ 192 R
Level Indicator (Amber) ..... 74, 313 Fuel Mileage................................. 84
Pressure Indicator ............... 74, 312 Gauge ............................................ 83 Radiator Overheating............ 308, 310
Selecting Proper Viscosity Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 79 Radio/CD Sound System .............. 148
Chart ............................... 239, 241 Octane Requirement ................. 184 Range ................................................ 84
Oil Level Indicator (Amber)... 74, 313 Refueling..................................... 185 RDS.................................................. 153
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 98 Polishing and Waxing ................... 289 Rear Fog Light ................................. 91
Outside Mirrors ............................. 126 Pollen Filter .................................... 293 Rear Lights, Bulb
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 82 Position Lights ................................. 90 Replacement ............................... 263
Overheating, Engine ............. 308, 310 Power Door Locks ........................... 99 Rear Seat, Armrest ........................ 111
Owners Maintenance Checks ..... 230 Power Steering Fluid..................... 252 Rear Seat, Folding ......................... 115
Power Windows ............................. 123 Rear View Mirror........................... 126
P Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19 Rear Window Demister .................. 94
Priming the Fuel System .............. 284 Rear Windscreen Wiper and
Paint Touch-up ............................... 290 Proper Seat Belt Usage ................... 17 Washer .......................................... 89
Panel Brightness Control ............... 93 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 14 Reclining the Front Seats ............. 113
Parking ............................................ 213 Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 Recommended Shift
Parking Brake ........................ 128, 129 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 Speeds ......................................... 205
Parking Brake and Brake Protecting Children ......................... 32 Reminder Indicators ........................ 74
System Indicator .................. 75, 317 Protecting Infants ........................ 39 Remote Audio Controls................. 176
Parking Over Things That Protecting Larger Children ........ 60 Remote Transmitter ...................... 104
Burn............................................. 213 Protecting Small Children .......... 41
Petrol ............................................... 184 Using Child Restraint Systems
Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 185 with Tethers ............................. 57 CONTINUED
347
06/10/30 17:29:05 32SJD620_351
Index
Replacement Information Seat Belts .................................... 10, 21 Sound System ................................. 148
Air Cleaner Element .................. 253 Additional Information ................ 21 Spare Tyre
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 293 Automatic Seat Belt Compact ...................................... 296
Fuel Filter ................................... 255 Tensioners ................................ 23 Inflating ....................................... 296
Fuses ........................................... 318 Cleaning ...................................... 292 Specifications ............................. 334
Light Bulbs ................................. 256 Detachable Anchor.................... 117 Spark Plug ...................................... 332
Schedule ..................................... 229 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 21 Specifications Charts..................... 330
Tyres ........................................... 277 Maintenance ................................. 23 Speedometer .................................... 81
Wiper Blades .............................. 271 Reminder Indicator and Speed-sensitive Volume
Replacing Seat Belts After a Beeper ................................. 21, 75 Compensation (SVC) ................ 159
Crash ............................................. 23 System Components.................... 21 Spotlights ........................................ 137
Reserve Tank, Engine Use During Pregnancy................ 19 SRS, Additional Information........... 26
Coolant ........................ 189, 243, 246 Seat Heaters ................................... 119 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Restraint, Child ................................ 32 Seat Under Box .............................. 133 How the SRS Indicator
Reverse Lockout ............................ 206 Seats, Adjusting the....................... 108 Works ........................................ 30
Roof Rack ....................................... 197 Security System ............................. 177 How Your Front Airbags
Rotation, Tyre ................................ 276 Service Intervals ............................ 229 Work.......................................... 27
Service Station Procedures .......... 185 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
S Setting the Clock ........................... 174 How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Side Airbags ............................... 12, 28 Work.......................................... 29
Safety Belts................................. 10, 21 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 SRS Components ......................... 26
Safety Features .................................. 9 Risks to Children ......................... 36 SRS Service................................... 30
Airbags .......................................... 12 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 12, 29 SRS Indicator.............................. 30, 75
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Signaling Turns ................................ 90 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 98
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 66 Snow Tyres ..................................... 278
Safety Messages ................................ ii Solvent-type Cleaners .................... 288
348
06/10/30 17:29:10 32SJD620_352
Index
Starting the Engine ............... 202, 203 Tailgate ........................................... 102 Fluid Selection............................ 249
Cold Climates ............................. 203 Tail-lights, Changing Bulbs Identification Number ............... 328
In Cold Weather at High in .................................................. 263 Shifting the Automatic .............. 207
Altitude ................................... 202 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 295 Shifting the Manual ................... 204
Switching Off ............................. 203 Technical Descriptions Treadwear ...................................... 275
Warming Up ............................... 203 Catalytic Converters.................. 337 Trip Meter ........................................ 83
With a Dead Battery ................. 305 Three Way Catalytic Turn Signals ..................................... 90
Steam Coming from Converter ................................ 336 Tyre Chains .................................... 279
Engine ................................. 308, 310 Temperature Gauge ........................ 82 Tyre, How to Change a Flat ......... 297
Steering Wheel Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 147 Tyres ............................................... 274
Adjustment ................................... 95 Temperature, Outside ..................... 82 Air Pressure ............................... 274
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 98 Tether Anchor Points...................... 57 Balancing .................................... 276
Stereo Sound System .................... 148 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 336 Chains ......................................... 279
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 283 Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 95 Checking Wear .......................... 275
Sunroof ............................................ 125 Time, Setting the ........................... 174 Compact Spare ........................... 296
Operation .................................... 125 Tonneau Cover............................... 120 Inflation ....................................... 274
Super Locking ................................ 100 Tools, Tyre Changing ................... 298 Inspection ................................... 275
Supplemental Restraint Towing Maintenance ............................... 276
System................................. 12, 26 A Trailer ...................................... 221 Replacing .................................... 277
Servicing ....................................... 30 Emergency Wrecker ................. 325 Rotating....................................... 276
SRS Indicator.......................... 30, 75 Equipment and Accessories ..... 223 Snow ............................................ 278
System Components.................... 26 Weight Limit .............................. 221 Specifications ............................. 334
Trailer Hitch Mounting Points..... 330
T Trailer Loading .............................. 221
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 225
Tachometer ...................................... 81 Transmission CONTINUED
349
06/10/30 17:29:15 32SJD620_353
Index
U W Wipers ........................................... 87
Winter Tyres .................................. 278
Ultrasonic Sensor .......................... 178 WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii Wiper Blades
Underside, Cleaning ...................... 294 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 66 Changing..................................... 271
Unexpected, Taking Care Washer, Windscreen Operation ...................................... 87
of the ........................................... 295 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 248 Rear Windscreen Wiper and
Upholstery Cleaning...................... 291 Operation ...................................... 87 Washer ...................................... 89
Washing .......................................... 288 Worn Tyres .................................... 275
V Water Draining .............................. 255 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 325
Indicator ........................................ 80
Vanity Mirror ................................. 134 Water In Diesel Filter Indicator ..... 80
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 196 Waxing and Polishing ................... 289
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 330 Wheels
Vehicle Identification Number..... 329 Adjusting the Steering ................ 95
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Alignment and Balance ............. 276
System..................................... 217 Cleaning Aluminium Alloys ...... 290
Activation Indicator ............. 78, 217 Compact Spare ........................... 296
System Indicator .................. 78, 217 Nut Wrench ................................ 299
On/Off Switch ........................... 218 Windows
Vehicle Storage .............................. 283 Auto Reverse .............................. 124
Ventilation ...................................... 140 Cleaning ...................................... 292
VIN .................................................. 329 Operating the Power ................. 123
Vinyl Cleaning ................................ 291 Rear, Demister ............................. 94
Viscosity, Oil .......................... 239, 241 Windscreen
Cleaning ................................ 87, 292
Washers ........................................ 87
350

FRV 07 Eng PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FRV 07 Eng PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

06/10/30 16:41:48 32SJD620_001

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to

A Few Words About Safety

Features ............................. 139 Appearance Care ................. 287

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type INSTRUMENT PANEL INSIDE MIRROR RAINFALL SENSOR

DRIVERS PASSENGERS FRONT

1 : For some types

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type

Your Vehicle at a Glance

1 : For some types

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

Important Safety Precautions

8 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Some features do not require any

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Your Vehicles Safety Features

10 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:

Belts should not be worn with straps

Each belt assembly must only be used

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Your Vehicles Safety Features

12 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction 1.Close the Doors 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Adjust the drivers seat as far to the

If you sit too close to the steering

14 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

In addition to adjusting the seat, you 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,

Passengers with adjustable seat-

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the seat-back to an

16 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the shoulder

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

18 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Driver and Passenger Safety 19

Protecting Adults and Teens

20 Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 21

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

The detachable seat belt should